Home
        THE BMW 3 SERIES SEDAN.
         Contents
1.        Tail lamps  bulb replacement Removing the exterior tail lamp  1  Open trunk lid     2  Use the screwdriver from the onboard ve   hicle tool kit to loosen the screw  arrow 1   and remove the cover  arrow 2     At a glance       1 Turn signal   2 Reversing lamp   3 Inside brake lamp 3  Use the screwdriver handle to loosen the  4 Taillamps two nuts  arrows 1 and 2  and remove  The  5    tail lamp is still attached to a rubber mount    Outside brake lamp anie ae    Bulb replacement  exterior tail lamps    General information   Follow general instructions  refer to page 204   Turn signal  21 watt bulb  P27WLL    Outer brake lamp  21 watt bulb  H21W     The tail lamps feature LED technology  Con     tact your service center in the event of a mal       function  4  Grasp the inner edge of the tail lamp and    carefully swing it back and out of the rub   ber mount  arrow 1  Use your free hand to       Use caution when replacing the bulb    Use caution and proceed one step ata hold it in place in order to prevent the tail  time when replacing the bulbs to prevent dam  lamp from coming loose suddenly  Make  age to the tail lamps or vehicle  lt  sure that the foam rubber sealing ring is on    the centering pin  arrow 2        210  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Replacing components   Mobility      5  Remove the connecting line from the clip component  arrow 2  Make sure that the  on the bulb holder  tail lamp engages in the rubber mount     6  Release the 
2.      The glass sunroof and sliding visor open  automatically  Pressing the switch again  stops the opening motion     Analogously  the glass sunroof is closed by  sliding the switch forward     The sliding visor remains open and can be  closed by hand     Convenient operation  refer to page 35  via the  remote control     Convenient closing  refer to page 39  with  Comfort Access     Comfort position    Stops the roof in the comfort position if the  roof is not fully open  This reduces wind noise  in the passenger compartment     If desired  continue the movement by pressing  the switch     Pinch protection system    If the closing force when closing the glass sun   roof exceeds a certain value  the closing move   ment is stopped  beginning at approximately  the middle of the opening in the roof  or from  the tilted position during closing     The glass sunroof opens again slightly     Danger of pinching even with pinch pro   tection  Despite the pinch protection system  check  that the roof s closing path is clear  otherwise   the closing action may not be interrupted in  certain extreme situations  such as when thin  objects are present  lt     Closing from the open position  without pinch protection    For example  if there is an external danger  pro   ceed as follows     1  Press the switch forward beyond the re   sistance point and hold     45    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Controls     Opening and closing    Pinch protection is limited and the
3.     Each tire  including the spare  if provided   should be checked monthly when cold and in   flated to the inflation pressure recommended  by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle  placard or tire inflation pressure label   If your  vehicle has tires of a different size than the size  indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation  pressure label  you should determine the  proper tire inflation pressure for those tires    As an added safety feature  your vehicle has  been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring  system  TPMS  that illuminates a low tire pres   sure telltale when one or more of your tires is  significantly under inflated  Accordingly  when  the low tire pressure telltale illuminates  you  should stop and check your tires as soon as  possible  and inflate them to the proper pres   sure  Driving on a significantly under inflated  tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to    100    tire failure  Under inflation also reduces fuel ef   ficiency and tire tread life  and may affect the  vehicle s handling and stopping ability  Please  note that the TPMS is not a substitute for  proper tire maintenance  and it is the driver s  responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure   even if under inflation has not reached the  level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low  tire pressure telltale  Your vehicle has also  been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi   cator to indicate when the system is not oper   ating properly  The TPMS malfunction indica   to
4.     User s manual for Navigation   Entertainment  Communication    The topics of Navigation  Entertainment  Com   munication and the short commands of the  voice activation system are described in a sep   arate user s manual  which is also included  with the onboard literature     Additional sources of information  The service center will be happy to answer any  other questions you may have     Information on BMW  e g   on technology  is  available on the Internet  www bmwusa com     Symbols    FN Indicates precautions that must be followed  precisely in order to avoid the possibility of  personal injury and serious damage to the  vehicle       Marks the end of a specific item of  information           Identifies Control Display texts used to  select individual functions           lt  Verbal instructions to use with the voice  activation system             Identifies the answers generated by the  voice activation system      amp  Refers to measures that can be taken to  help protect the environment     Symbols on vehicle components     Ti  Indicates that you should consult the  relevant section of this Owner s Manual for  information on a particular part or assembly     Vehicle equipment    This Owner s Manual describes all models and  all standard  country specific and optional  equipment that is offered in the model series   Therefore  in this Owner s Manual  equipment  is also described and illustrated that is not  available in your vehicle  e g   because of the  selected 
5.    2  Start the engine of the vehicle being  started in the usual way     217    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14       Mobility Breakdown assistance    If the first starting attempt is not success   ful  wait a few minutes before making an   other attempt in order to allow the dis   charged battery to recharge     3  Let both engines run for several minutes     4  Disconnect the jumper cables in the re   verse order     Check the battery and recharge if necessary     Tow starting and towing    Note    Tow starting and towing    When tow starting and towing the vehi   cle  switch off the Intelligent Safety systems   otherwise  improper behavior of the braking  function of individual systems could result in  an accident       Switching off Intelligent Safety systems  refer  to page 102     Manual transmission  Gearshift lever in neutral position     Towing    Follow the towing instructions       Follow all towing instructions  otherwise   vehicle damage or accidents may occur  lt        gt  Make sure that the ignition is switched on   otherwise  the low beams  tail lamps  turn  signals  and windshield wipers may be un   available      gt  Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle  tilted  as the front wheels could turn      gt  When the engine is stopped  there is no  power assist  Consequently  more force  needs to be applied when braking and  steering      gt  Larger steering wheel movements are re   quired     218     gt  The towing vehicle must not be li
6.    BMW Advanced Diesel    The concept    BMW Advanced Diesel reduces nitrogen ox   ides in the diesel emissions by injecting diesel  exhaust fluid reducing agent into the exhaust  system  A chemical reaction takes place inside  the catalytic converter that minimizes nitrogen  oxides     The vehicle has a tank that can be refilled     To be able to start the engine as usual  there  must be an adequate reducing agent     Reducing agent is added by the service center     Warming up the system    In order to warm the engine up to its operating  temperature after a cold start  the automatic  transmission may subsequently shift up to the  next higher gear     Displays in the instrument cluster    Reserve display    This display in the instrument cluster provides  information about the distance that can still be  driven with the current reserve level     The reserve display is shown  starting at a remaining range of  approx  1 000 miles 1 600 km     181    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14       Mobility Fuel    Refill in good time    The reducing agent must be replenished  as soon as the Reserve display appears  other   wise the engine cannot be restarted        Diesel exhaust fluid on minimum    The engine will continue to run  even when the display shows      as long as it is not switched off  and all other operating condi   tions are satisfied  sufficient fuel       for example        Engine does not start    Do not continue driving to the limit of the  remaini
7.    Or    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Driving comfort   Controls            Press the rocker switch while the system is in   terrupted     When the system is switched on  the current  speed is maintained and stored as the desired  speed    This is displayed  refer to page 127  in the  speedometer and briefly in the instrument  cluster     When cruise control is maintained or stored   DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on   if necessary     Changing maintaining speed  The rocker switch can be pressed while the    system is interrupted in order to maintain and  store the current speed     Adapting the desired speed    Adapt the desired speed to the road con   ditions and be ready to brake at all times  oth   erwise  there is the danger of an accident oc   curring     Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly  until the desired speed is set        If active  the displayed speed is stored and the  vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is  clear      gt  Each time the rocker switch is pressed to  the point of resistance  the desired speed  increases or decreases by approx   1 mph 1 km h      gt  Each time the rocker switch is pressed  past the point of resistance  the desired  speed increases or decreases by a maxi   mum of 5 mph 10 km h     The maximum speed that can be set de   pends on the vehicle      gt  Pressing the rocker switch to the resist   ance point and holding it accelerates or de   celerates the vehicle without requiring  
8.    Owner s Manual     for Vehicle  m    The Ultimate  Driving Machine                T iiz H      TA id UELLE      i  j r  Se       THE BMW 3 SERIES SEDAN   OWNER S MANUAL     BMW EfficientDynamics    Less emissions  More driving pleasure     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    3 Series Owner s Manual for Vehicle  Thank you for choosing a BMW     The more familiar you are with your vehicle  the better control  you will have on the road  We therefore strongly suggest     Read this Owner s Manual before starting off in your new BMW   Also use the Integrated Owner s Manual in your vehicle  It con   tains important information on vehicle operation that will help  you make full use of the technical features available in your  BMW  The manual also contains information designed to en   hance operating reliability and road safety  and to contribute to  maintaining the value of your BMW     Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the printed or  Integrated Owner s Manual are located in the appendix of the  printed quick reference for the vehicle     Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro   chures in the onboard literature     We wish you a safe and enjoyable drive   BMW AG       BMW recommends Castrol    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14       2014 Bayerische Motoren Werke  Aktiengesellschaft   Munich  Germany   Reprinting  including excerpts  only with the written  consent of BMW AG  Munich    US English II 14  03 1
9.    The alarm system  refer to page 41  is dis   armed     Convenient opening    The remote control can be used to open the  windows and the glass sunroof after unlocking     E Press and hold the button on the re   mote control     Releasing the button stops the motion     Locking     Press the button on the remote control     35    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Controls     Opening and closing    Locking from the outside    Do not lock the vehicle from the outside  if there are people in it  as the vehicle cannot  be unlocked from inside without special knowl   edge  lt     The alarm system  refer to page 41  is armed     Switching on interior lamps and  courtesy lamps    Press the button on the remote control  with the vehicle locked     If the button is pressed again within 10 sec   onds of the vehicle being locked  the interior  motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor of the anti   theft warning system  refer to page 43  are  switched off  After locking  wait 10 seconds  before pressing the button again     Panic mode  You can trigger the alarm system if you find  yourself in a dangerous situation     Press the button on the remote con   trol for at least 3 seconds     q        To switch off the alarm  press any button     Opening the trunk lid    ra Press the button on the remote con   trol for approx  1 second     The trunk lid opens  regardless of whether the  vehicle was previously locked or unlocked     During opening  the trunk lid pivots back an
10.    The engine starts automatically under the fol   lowing conditions      gt  Automatic transmission   By releasing the brake pedal    gt  Manual transmission   The clutch pedal is pressed   After the engine starts  accelerate as usual     Safety mode    After the engine switches off automatically  it  will not start again automatically if any one of  the following conditions are met      gt  The driver s safety belt is unbuckled and  the driver s door is open      gt  The hood was unlocked     Some indicator lamps light up for varying  lengths of time     The engine can only be started via the Start   Stop button     64    Note    Even if driving away was not intended  the de   activated engine starts up automatically in the  following situations      gt  Excessive warming of the passenger com   partment when the cooling function is  switched on     The steering wheel is turned     Automatic transmission  change from se   lector lever position D to N  R or M S      gt  Automatic transmission  change from se   lector lever position P to N  D  R or M S      gt  The vehicle begins rolling     Fogging of the windows when the auto   matic climate control is switched on     Vehicle battery is heavily discharged     Excessive cooling of the passenger com   partment when the heating is switched on      gt  Low brake vacuum pressure  this can oc   cur  for example  if the brake pedal is de   pressed a number of times in succession     Activating deactivating the system  manually    U
11.    The xDrive all wheel drive system variably dis   tributes the drive forces to the front and rear  axles as demanded by the driving situation and  road surface     Dynamic Damping Control    The concept    This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo   tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav   eling on uneven road surfaces     The system enhances driving dynamics and  comfort as required for the road surface and  driving style     Programs  The system offers several different programs     The programs can be selected via the Driving  Dynamics Control  refer to page 116     SPORT    Consistently sporty control of the shock ab   sorbers for greater driving agility     115    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Controls     Driving stability control systems    SPORT     Consistently sporty control of the shock ab   sorbers for greater driving agility when driving  with limited driving stabilization     COMFORT ECO PRO  Balanced control of the vehicle     Variable sport steering    The variable sport steering increases the  steering angle of the front wheels at large  steering wheel angles  e g   in tight curves or  when parking  Steering becomes more direct     It also varies the force required to turn the  wheels in accordance with the vehicle speed     This results in a sporty steering response  In    addition  it becomes easier to steer during  parking and maneuvering     Driving Dynamics Control    The concept    The Driving Dynamics Control can be
12.    Tool 204   Top View 134   Total vehicle weight 228   Touchpad 19   Tow fitting 219   Towing 218   Tow starting 218   Tow truck 218   TPM Tire Pressure Moni   tor 97   Traction control 115   TRACTION program  Dy   namic Driving Control 115   Transmission  automatic 69   Transmission  manual 69   Transporting children  safely 57   Tread  tires 193   Trip computer 85    239    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Reference   Everything from A to Z    Triple turn signal activa   tion 66   Trip odometer 79   Truck for tow starting   towing 218   Trunk lid closing 38   Trunk lid  emergency unlock   ing 38   Trunk lid  hotel function 38   Trunk lid opening 38   Trunk lid via remote con   trol 36   Turning circle 228   Turning circle lines  rearview  camera 132   Turn signals  operation 65    U    Unintentional alarm 43   Units of measure 87   Universal remote control 148   Unlock button  automatic  transmission 70   Unlocking locking via door  lock 37   Unlocking locking with re   mote control 35   Unlocking  settings 41   Updates made after the edito   rial deadline 6   Upholstery care 223   USB interface 153    V    Variable sport steering 116  Vehicle battery 212  Vehicle battery  replac   ing 212  Vehicle  breaking in 162  Vehicle care 222  Vehicle equipment 6  Vehicle identification number   refer to Identification num     240    ber in the engine compart   ment 196   Vehicle jack 212   Vehicle paint 222   Vehicle storage 224   Vehicle wash 221   Ventilatio
13.    Uniform Tire Quality Grading    Quality grades can be found where applicable  on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder  and maximum section width     For example  Treadwear 200  Traction AA   Temperature A    DOT Quality Grades  Treadwear   Traction AAABC  Temperature ABC    All passenger car tires must conform to Fed   eral Safety Requirements in addition to these  grades     Treadwear    The treadwear grade is a comparative rating  based on the wear rate of the tire when tested  under controlled conditions on a specified gov   ernment test course  For example  a tire  graded 150 would wear one and one half  1 g   times as well on the government course as a  tire graded 100  The relative performance of  tires depends upon the actual conditions of  their use  however  and may depart signifi   cantly from the norm due to variations in driv   ing habits  service practices and differences in  road characteristics and climate     Traction    The traction grades  from highest to lowest   are AA  A  B  and C     192    Those grades represent the tire s ability to  stop on wet pavement as measured under  controlled conditions on specified government  test surfaces of asphalt and concrete  A tire  marked C may have poor traction performance     The traction grade assigned to this tire is  based on straight ahead braking traction tests   and does not include acceleration  cornering   hydroplaning  or peak traction characteristics     Temperature    The temperature grades are A  
14.    gt  When sensors are very dirty or covered in  Ice     When sensors are covered in snow    gt  On rough road surfaces     On uneven surfaces  such as speed  bumps      gt  In large buildings with right angles and  smooth walls  e g   in underground ga   rages     In heavy exhaust      gt  Due to other ultrasound sources  e g    sweeping machines  high pressure steam  cleaners or neon lights     The malfunction is signaled by a continu   ous tone alternating between the front and  rear speakers  As soon as the malfunction  due to other ultrasound sources is no lon   ger present  the system is again fully func   tional     Malfunction  A Check Control message is displayed     The range of the sensors is shown as a shaded  area on the Control Display     PDC has failed  Have the system checked    To ensure full operability     gt  Keep the sensors clean and free of ice     gt  Do not adhere any stickers to the sensors      gt  When using high pressure washers  do not  spray the sensors for long periods and  maintain a distance of at least 12 in 3O cm     130    Surround View    The concept    Surround View comprises various camera as   sistance systems that help the driver when  parking  maneuvering  and at complex exits  and intersections      gt  Rearview camera  refer to page 130   gt  Side View  refer to page 133    gt  Top View  refer to page 134     Rearview camera    The concept    The rearview camera provides assistance in  parking and maneuvering backwards  The area 
15.    ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi   nations and colors     Several of the lamps are checked for proper  functioning and light up temporarily when the  engine is started or the ignition is switched on     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Displays    Overview  indicator warning lamps    Symbol Function or system    o S     Tm  G    D gt  3          B        2    K  a  Pad    a    a AD    Turn signal     Front fog lamps     High beams     High beam Assistant     Parking lamps  headlamp control     Active Cruise Control     Vehicle detection  Active Cruise    Control  collision warning     Pedestrian warning     Cruise control     Lane departure warning     DSC Dynamic Stability Control     DSC Dynamic Stability Control is  deactivated or DTC Dynamic Trac   tion Control is activated     Tire Pressure Monitor   Flat Tire Monitor     Safety belts     Symbol Function or system    Airbag system     Steering system     Engine functions           Parking brake     w  D   gt   x  m    Brake system     In Canadian models          Parking brake   Brake system     ABS Antilock Brake System      gt   gJ  o     In Canadian models  ABS Antilock Brake System     At least one Check Control mes   sage is displayed or is stored  sym   bol in display       gt       Text messages    Text messages in combination with a symbol  in the instrument cluster explain a Check Con   trol message and the meaning of the indicator  and warning lamps     Supplementary text 
16.   11 14    Driving tips _ ecm Saving fuel    Saving fuel    Vehicle equipment    All standard  country specific and optional  equipment that is offered in the model series is  described in this chapter  Therefore  equip   ment is also described that is not available in a  vehicle  e  g   because of the selected optional  equipment or country variant  This also applies  for safety related functions and systems     General information    Your vehicle contains advanced technology for  the reduction of fuel consumption and emis   sions     Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif   ferent factors     The implementation of certain measures  driv    ing style and regular maintenance can have an   influence on fuel consumption and on the envi   ronmental impact     Remove unnecessary cargo    Additional weight increases fuel consumption     Remove attached parts  following use  Remove auxiliary mirrors  roof or rear luggage    racks which are no longer required following  use     Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero   dynamics and increase the fuel consumption     168    Close the windows and glass  sunroof  Driving with the glass sunroof and windows    open results in increased air resistance and  thereby reduces the range     Tires    General information    Tires can affect fuel consumption values in  various ways  for instance fuel consumption  can be influenced by the size of the tires     Check the tire inflation pressure  regularly    Check and  if necessary  corre
17.   By the front sensors and the two rear cor   ner sensors at approx  24 in 60 cm      gt  By the rear middle sensors at approx   5 ft 1 50 m     To ensure full operability      gt  Donotcover sensors  e g   by stickers  bi   cycle racks and the like      gt  Keep the sensors clean and free of ice      gt  When using high pressure washers  do not  spray the sensors for long periods and  maintain a distance of at least 12 in 3O cm     128    Hints    Personal responsibility    Even an active system does not relieve  the driver from personal responsibility for the  driving process    Because of technical system limits  the system  cannot independently react appropriately in all  traffic situations     Continuously and attentively monitor the driv   ing process  the area surrounding the vehicle  and the traffic situation  and actively intervene  when required  otherwise  there is a risk of an  accident   lt     Avoid driving quickly with PDC    Avoid approaching an object quickly     Avoid driving away quickly while PDC is not yet  active     For technical reasons  the system may other   wise be too late in issuing a warning   lt     At a glance    With front PDC  button in vehicle       PDC Park Distance Control    Switching on off    Switching on automatically    With the engine running  engage selector lever  position R     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Driving comfort   Controls    Automatic deactivation during forward  travel    The system switches o
18.   C or lower  a signal  sounds              ACheck Control message is  displayed     There is an increased risk of ice on roads     Ice on roads    Even at temperatures above   37   F  3   C  there can be a risk of ice on  roads     Therefore  drive carefully on bridges and  shaded roads  for example  to avoid the in   creased risk of an accident   lt     Time    The time is displayed at the bot   tom of the instrument cluster     08 35 am       Setting the time and time for   mat  refer to page 86     The date is displayed in the    oR Krk Computer        Setting the date and date for     mat  refer to page 86     Range    Display    After the reserve range is  reached      gt  ACheck Control message is  displayed briefly         gt  The remaining range is  shown on the onboard com   puter      gt  When a dynamic driving style is used  such  as when cornering quickly  operation of the  engine is not always ensured     The Check Control message appears continu   ously below a range of approx  30 miles 50 km   Refuel promptly    Refuel no later than at a range of  30 miles 50 km  or operation of the engine is  not ensured and damage may occur  lt     Displaying the cruising range  Depending on the equipment version  the  range is displayed in the instrument cluster   1   Settings    2   Instr  cluster display    3   Additional indicators     79    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Controls   Displays    Current fuel consumption    Instrument cluster    Dis
19.   Steering wheel    General information    Do not adjust while driving    Do not adjust the steering wheel while  driving  otherwise  an unexpected movement  could result in an accident     Adjusting         1  Fold the lever down     2  Move the steering wheel to the preferred  height and angle to suit your seating posi   tion     3  Fold the lever back     Steering wheel heating    Switching on off    ry Press the button      gt  On  the LED lights up    gt  Off  the LED goes out     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Transporting children safely   Controls    Transporting children safely    Vehicle equipment    All standard  country specific and optional  equipment that is offered in the model series is  described in this chapter  Therefore  equip   ment is also described that is not available in a  vehicle  e  g   because of the selected optional  equipment or country variant  This also applies  for safety related functions and systems     The right place for children    Note    Children in the vehicle    Do not leave children unattended in the  vehicle  otherwise  they could endanger them   selves and other persons  e g   by opening the  doors  lt     Children should always be in the rear    Accident research shows that the safest place  for children is in the back seat     Transporting children in the rear       Only transport children younger than  13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft 150 cm in  the rear in child restraint fixing systems pro   vided
20.   armed or disarmed at the same time     Door lock and armed alarm system    The alarm system is triggered when the door is  opened  if the vehicle is unlocked via the door  lock     In order to terminate this alarm  unlock vehicle  with the remote control or switch on the igni   tion  if necessary  by emergency detection of  the remote control     Trunk lid and armed alarm system    The trunk lid can be opened even when the  alarm system is armed     After the trunk lid is closed  it is locked and  monitored again if the doors are locked  The  hazard warning system flashes once     Panic mode    You can trigger the alarm system if you find  yourself in a dangerous situation     d   Press the button on the remote con   trol for at least 3 seconds     To switch off the alarm  press any button   Switching off the alarm    To terminate the alarm      gt  Unlock the vehicle using the remote con   trol     42     gt  With Comfort Access  If you are carrying  the remote control with you  grasp the  driver side or front passenger side door  handle completely     Indicator lamp on the interior rearview  mirror        gt  The indicator lamp flashes briefly every  2 seconds     The system is armed    gt  The indicator lamp flashes after locking     The doors  hood or trunk lid is not closed  properly  but the rest of the vehicle is se   cured     After 10 seconds  the indicator lamp  flashes continuously  Interior motion sen   sor and tilt alarm sensor are not active      gt  The indic
21.   fuel may escape  causing harm to the environ   ment and damaging the vehicle   lt     Handling fuels       Obey safety regulations posted at the  gas station  lt     179  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Mobility   Fuel    Fuel    Vehicle equipment    All standard  country specific and optional  equipment that is offered in the model series is  described in this chapter  Therefore  equip   ment is also described that is not available in a  vehicle  e  g   because of the selected optional  equipment or country variant  This also applies  for safety related functions and systems     Fuel recommendation    Note    General fuel quality    Even fuels that conform to the specifica   tions can be of low quality  This may cause en   gine problems  for instance poor engine start   ing behavior  poor handling and or  performance  Switch gas stations or use a  brand name fuel with a higher octane rating     Gasoline    For the best fuel economy  the gasoline should  be sulfur free or very low in sulfur content     Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con   taining metal must not be used   Refuel only with unleaded gasoline with   out metallic additives     Do not refuel with any leaded gasoline or gaso   line with metallic additives  e  g  manganese or  iron  or permanent damage to the catalytic  converter and other components   lt     Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of  10    i  e   E10  may be used for refueling     Ethanol should satisfy the following
22.   gt  In some cases  an unintentional alarm can  be triggered by the interior motion sensor  of the alarm system  Follow the instruc   tions on avoiding an unintentional alarm   refer to page 43     Guide rails in car washes    Avoid car washes with guide rails higher  than 4 in 10 cm  otherwise  the vehicle body  could be damaged   lt     Before driving into a car wash    In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll ina  car wash  take the following steps     Manual transmission     Drive into the car wash   Shift to neutral   Switch the engine off       A SS    Switch on the ignition   Automatic transmission     1  Drive into the car wash     221    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14       Mobility Care    2  Engage selector lever position N   3  Switch the engine off     In this way  the ignition remains switched  on  and a Check Control message is dis   played     Do not turn off the ignition in the car  wash    Do not turn off the ignition in the car wash   otherwise  selector lever position P is en   gaged and damages can result        To start the engine     1  Depress the brake pedal   2  Press the Start Stop button     Pressing the Start Stop button without step   ping on the brake turns the ignition off     The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside  when in selector lever position N  A signal is  sounded when an attempt is made to lock the  vehicle     Selector lever position    Selector lever position P is engaged automati   cally      gt  When
23.  157    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Controls     Storage compartments    Connection for an external audio  device    An external audio device  e g    an MP3 player  can be con   nected via the AUX IN port or  the USB audio interface in the  center armrest        Storage compartment in the  rear    A storage compartment is located in the center  armrest     Cupholders    Hints    rN Shatter proof containers and no hot  drinks    Use light and shatter proof containers and do  not transport hot drinks  Otherwise  there is  the increased danger of injury in an accident  lt     Unsuitable containers       Do not forcefully push unsuitable con   tainers into the cupholders  This may result in  damage  lt     Front       158    Storage tray for front cupholders    The cupholder with the storage tray can be  used for additional storage  To do this  place  the storage tray in the cupholder     Only use the storage tray for small objects   such as keys or the remote control     When not in use  stow the storage tray in the  glove compartment net  Insert the storage tray  into the net so that the top surface faces up   Note the trapezoidal shape of the net and tray     Rear  In the center armrest        Pull the center armrest forward at the strap   To open  press the button     To close  push both covers back in  one after  the other     Pushing back the covers       Push back the covers before folding up  the center armrest  otherwise  the cupholder  could b
24.  184  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Wheels and tires   Mobility    Wheels and tires    Vehicle equipment    All standard  country specific and optional  equipment that is offered in the model series is  described in this chapter  Therefore  equip   ment is also described that is not available in a  vehicle  e  g   because of the selected optional  equipment or country variant  This also applies  for safety related functions and systems     Tire inflation pressure    Safety information    The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres   sure influence the following      gt  The service life of the tires    gt  Road safety    gt  Driving comfort     Checking the pressure    Tires have a natural  consistent loss of pres   sure     Check the tire inflation pressure regularly    Regularly check the tire inflation pres   sure  and correct it as needed  at least twice a  month and before a long trip  If you fail to ob   serve this precaution  you may be driving on  tires with incorrect tire pressures  a condition  that may not only compromise your vehicle s  driving stability  but also lead to tire damage  and the risk of an accident        Tires heat up during driving  and the tire infla   tion pressure increases along with the temper   ature of the tire  The tire inflation pressure  specifications relate to cold tires or tires with  the ambient temperature     Only check the tire inflation pressure when the  tires are cold  This means after driving no mo
25.  2 925 743   11 14    Mobility   Engine compartment    Engine compartment    Vehicle equipment    All standard  country specific and optional  equipment that is offered in the model series is  described in this chapter  Therefore  equip     Important       1  2  3  4  5    l       Jump starting  negative terminal  Vehicle identification number  Washer fluid reservoir  Jump starting  positive terminal  Engine compartment fuse box    196    ment is also described that is not available in a   vehicle  e  g   because of the selected optional   equipment or country variant  This also applies  for safety related functions and systems     features in the engine compartment         busca A    6 Oil filler neck  7 Coolant reservoir    The coolant reservoir for 6 cylinder and  diesel engines is located on the opposite  side of the engine compartment     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Engine compartment   Mobility      Hood    Hints    Working in the engine compartment    Never attempt to perform any service or  repair operations on your vehicle without the  necessary professional technical training     If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide   lines  have any work on the vehicle performed  only by a service center    If this work is not carried out properly  there is  the danger of subsequent damage and related  safety hazards  lt     Never reach into the engine compart   ment       Never reach into the intermediate spaces or  gaps in the engine compartme
26.  4 340  kg 1 950 1 969  Load los kg 900 408  Approved front axle load lbs kg 1 985 900  Approved rear axle load lbs kg 2 480 1 125  Approved roof load capacity lbs kg 165 75  Cargo area capacity cu ft l 16 9 480  228    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Technical data Reference    Approved gross vehicle weight lbs 4 365 4 420  kg 1 980 2 005  Load lbs kg 900 408  Approved front axle load los kg 2 015 914  Approved rear axle load los kg 2 510 1 139  Approved roof load capacity los kg 165 75  Cargo area capacity cu ft l 16 9 480       Approved gross vehicle weight lbs 4 540 4 565  kg 2 059 2 071  Load los kg 900 408  Approved front axle load los kg 2 140 971  Approved rear axle load los kg 2 535 1 150  Approved roof load capacity los kg 165 75  Cargo area capacity cu ft l 16 9 480       Approved gross vehicle weight lbs 4 465 4 505  kg 2 025 2 043  Load lbs kg 900 408  Approved front axle load los kg 2 125 964  Approved rear axle load los kg 2 510 1 139  Approved roof load capacity los kg 165 75  Cargo area capacity cu ft l 16 9 480       229  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    bG   echnical data    Approved gross vehicle weight los kg 4 585 2 080  Load lbs kg 900 408  Approved front axle load los kg 2 160 980  Approved rear axle load los kg 2 555 1 159  Approved roof load capacity los kg 165 75  Cargo area capacity cu ft l 16 9 480       Approved gross vehicle weight lbs 4 675 4 695  kg 2 121 2 130  Load los kg 900 408  Approved front a
27.  60   C  Follow the manufac   turer s instructions     Aggressive  acidic or alkaline cleaning agents    can destroy the protective layer of adjacent  components  such as the brake disk     Chrome surfaces    Carefully clean components such as the radia   tor grille or door handles with an ample supply  of water  possibly with shampoo added  partic     ularly when they have been exposed to road  Salt     Rubber components    Aside from water  treat only with rubber  cleansers     When cleaning rubber seals  do not use any  silicon containing car care products in order to  avoid damage or reduced noise damping     Fine wood parts    Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo   nents only with a moist rag  Then dry with a  soft cloth     Plastic components  These include    Imitation leather surfaces   Headliner    Lamp lenses    Instrument cluster cover     VV VV    Matte black spray coated components   Painted parts in the interior    Clean with a microfiber cloth    Lightly dampen the cloth with water    Do not soak the headliner    Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol  or solvents    Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or  solvents  such as lacquer thinners  heavy duty  grease removers  fuel  or such  this could lead  to surface damage  lt     Safety belts    Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and  thus have a negative impact on safety     Chemical cleaning    Do not clean chemically  this can destroy  the webbing  lt     223    Online Edition for Part n
28.  75   Electronic Stability Program  ESP  refer to DSC 114   Emergency detection  remote  control 33   Emergency release  fuel filler  flap 178   Emergency Request 215   Emergency service  refer to  Roadside Assistance 216   Emergency start function  en   gine start 33   Emergency unlocking  trunk  lid 38   Energy Control 80   Energy recovery 80   Engine  automatic Start Stop  function 63   Engine  automatic switch   off 63   Engine compartment 196   Engine compartment  work   Ing in 197   Engine coolant 201   Engine idling when driving   coasting 172   Engine oil 198   Engine oil  adding 199   Engine oil additives 199   Engine oil change 200   Engine oil filler neck 199   Engine oil temperature 78    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Everything from A to Z   Reference        Engine oil types  alterna   tive 200   Engine oil types  ap   proved 200   Engine start during malfunc   tion 33   Engine start  jump start   ing 216   Engine start  refer to Starting  the engine 62   Engine stop 62   Engine temperature 78   Entering a car wash 221   Equipment  interior 148   ESP Electronic Stability Pro   gram  refer to DSC 114   Exchanging wheels tires 193   Exhaust system 163   Exterior mirror  automatic  dimming feature 55   Exterior mirrors 54   External start 216   External temperature dis   play 79   External temperature warn   ing 79   Eyes for securing cargo 166    IF    Failure message  refer to  Check Control 76   False alarm  refer to Uninten   tional alar
29.  925 748   11 14    Climate control   Controls    Climate control    Vehicle equipment ment is also described that is not available in a  _ l vehicle  e  g   because of the selected optional  All standard  country specific and optional equipment or country variant  This also applies    equipment that is offered in the model seriesis for safety related functions and systems   described in this chapter  Therefore  equip     Automatic climate control       10 9 8  1 Seat heating  left 50 6 Temperature  2 Vent settings 7 Seat heating  right 50  3 Rear window defroster 8 Cooling function  4 Airflow 9 Recirculated air mode  5 AUTO program 10 Interior temperature sensor    141  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Climate control       Climate control functions in detail    Manual air distribution    Turn the wheel to select the de   sired program or the desired in   termediate setting         gt  W Windows    gt  f Upper body region      gt    Windows  upper body region  and foot   well      gt     Footwell     Defrosting windows and removing  condensation    Direct the air distribution toward windows  in   crease the air flow and temperature  and  if  necessary  use the cooling function     Rear window defroster    Press the button     The rear window defroster switches  off automatically after a certain period of time     Air flow  manual         Press the left or right side of the but   i ton  decrease or increase air flow     The air flow of the air conditione
30.  Auto   matic recirculated air con   trol 145   Overheating of engine  refer  to Coolant temperature 78    P    Paint  vehicle 222   Parallel parking assistant 136   Park Distance Control  PDC 128   Parked car ventilation 147   Parked vehicle  condensa   tion 164   Parking aid  refer to PDC 128   Parking assistant 136   Parking brake 65   Parking lamps 89   Particulate filter 163   Parts and accessories 7   Passenger side mirror  tilting  downward 55   Pathway lines  rearview cam   era 131    237    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Reference   Everything from A to Z    PDC Park Distance Con   trol 128   Pedestrian warning with city  braking function 108   Personal Profile 33   Personal Profile  exporting  profiles 34   Personal Profile  importing  profiles 35   Pinch protection system   glass sunroof 45   Pinch protection system  win   dows 44   Plastic  care 223   Power failure 213   Power sunroof  glass 45   Power windows 43   Pressure  tire air pres   sure 185   Pressure warning FTM   tires 100   Profile  refer to Personal Pro   file 33   Programmable memory but   tons  iDrive 22   Protective function  glass  sunroof 45   Protective function  win   dows 44   Push and turn switch  refer to  Controller 16  17    R    Radiator fluid 201   Radio operated key  refer to  Remote control 32   Radio ready state 62   Radio  see user s manual for  Navigation  Entertainment  and Communication   Rain sensor 67   Rear socket 153   Rear turn signal  bulb replace   m
31.  Diesel exhaust fluid  replen   ishing yourself 182   Diesel particulate filter 163   Digital clock 79   Digital compass 150   Dimensions 228   Dimmable exterior mirrors 55   Dimmable interior rearview  mirror 56    234    Direction indicator  refer to  Turn signals 65   Display  electronic  instru   ment cluster 75   Display in windshield 87   Display lighting  refer to In   strument lighting 92   Displays 73   Displays  cleaning 224   Disposal  coolant 201   Disposal  vehicle battery 213   Distance control  refer to  PDC 128   Distance to destination 84   Divided screen view  split  screen 22   Door lock 37   Door lock  refer to Remote  control 32   Drive off assistant 118   Drive off assistant  refer to  DSC 114   Driver assistance  refer to In   telligent Safety 102   Driving Assistant  refer to In   telligent Safety 102   Driving Dynamics Con   trol 116   Driving instructions  breaking  in 162   Driving mode 116   Driving notes  general 162   Driving stability control sys   tems 114   Driving style analysis 173   Driving tips 162   DSC Dynamic Stability Con   trol 114   DTC Dynamic Traction Con   trol 115   Dynamic Damping Con   trol 115   Dynamic Stability Control  DSC 114   Dynamic Traction Control  DTC 115    E    ECO PRO 169   ECO PRO  bonus range 170   ECO PRO display 169   ECO PRO driving mode 169   ECO PRO driving style analy   sis 173   ECO PRO mode 169   ECO PRO Tip   driving in   struction 171   EfficientDynamics 171   Electronic displays  instru   ment cluster
32.  The procedure stops when a switch for adjust     ing the seat or one of the buttons is pressed  estimating AISIANCES COMEGUY    Objects reflected in the mirror are closer  Safety mode than they appear  Do not estimate the distance  to the traffic behind you based on what you  see in the mirror  as this will increase your risk  of an accident        1  Close the driver s door or switch on the ig   nition     54  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Adjusting   Controls    Depending on how the vehicle is equipped  the  mirror setting is stored for the remote control  in use  When the vehicle is unlocked via the re   mote control  the position is automatically re   trieved if the setting for this function is active     Selecting a mirror    To change over to the other mirror   Slide the mirror changeover switch     Adjusting electrically  The setting corresponds to the direc   tion in which the button is pressed     Saving positions  Seat and mirror memory  refer to page 53    Adjusting manually    If an electrical malfunction occurs  for example   press the edges of the mirror glass     Automatic Curb Monitor    The concept    When the reverse gear is engaged  the mirror  glass tilts downward slightly on the front pas   senger side  This improves your view of the  curb and other low lying obstacles when park   ing  for example     Activating       1  m  Slide the mirror changeover switch  to the driver s side mirror position     2  Engage selector lever posit
33.  The system may not be fully functional in the  following situations      gt  In heavy fog  rain  sprayed water or snow   fall     In tight curves      gt  If the driving stability control systems are  limited or deactivated  for example  DSC  OFF      gt  Ifthe radar sensor is dirty or obscured     Prewarning sensitivity    Depending on the set prewarning time  this  may result in increased false warnings     Pedestrian warning with city  braking function    The concept   The system can help to prevent accidents with  pedestrians    The system issues a warning in the city driving  speed area if there is imminent danger of a col   lision with pedestrians and includes a braking  function    The system is controlled via the camera in the  base of the interior mirror     108    General information    The system issues a warning with brightness  staring at approx  6 mph 10 km h to approx   35 mph 60 km h regarding a possible risk of  collision with pedestrians and assists with a  brake intervention shortly before a collision     It responds to persons that are within the de   tection range of the system     Detection range       The detection area in front of the vehicle is div   ided into two areas      gt  Central area  arrow 1  directly in front of the  vehicle      gt  Expanded area  arrow 2  to the right and  left     A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo   cated within the central area  A warning is is   sued about pedestrians who are located within  the extended ar
34.  Vehicle equipment    All standard  country specific and optional  equipment that is offered in the model series is  described in this chapter  Therefore  equip   ment is also described that is not available in a  vehicle  e  g   because of the selected optional  equipment or country variant  This also applies  for safety related functions and systems     Hints    Danger of burns from hot engine    Do not open the cooling system while  the engine is hot  otherwise  escaping coolant  may cause burns     Suitable additives    Only use suitable additives  otherwise   engine damage may occur  The additives are  harmful to your health  lt        Coolant consists of water and additives     Not all commercially available additives are  suitable for the vehicle  Information about the  suitable additives are available from the service  center     Coolant level    General information    Depending on the engine installation  the cool   ant reservoir may be located on the opposite  side of the engine compartment     Checking  1  Let the engine cool     2  The coolant level is correct if it lies be   tween the minimum and maximum marks     The marks are on the side of the coolant    reservoir   Symbol Meaning  Y Maximum  AN Minimum  Adding    1  Let the engine cool     2  Turn the cap of the coolant reservoir  slightly counterclockwise to allow any ex   cess pressure to dissipate  and then open  it             a   m  j g  mY g J   rs g   Ss  A 4 r r   gt    p    f  f a i LA    3  Ifthe co
35.  an accident  lt     General information  Depending on the set driving program  the    characteristics of the cruise control can   change in certain areas    Ata glance   Buttons on the steering wheel  Press the button Function    System on off  interrupt    Store speed       Resume speed       Rocker switch  change   hold  store speed    Controls    Switching on           6  Press the button on the steering    wheel        The marking in the speedometer is set to the  current speed     Cruise control can be used     126    Switching off    Deactivated or interrupted system    If the system is deactivated or inter   rupted  actively intervene by braking and  if  necessary  with evasive maneuvers  otherwise   there is the danger of an accident occurring   lt     Press the button      gt  If active  press twice    gt  If interrupted  press once     The displays go out  The stored desired speed  is deleted     Interrupting  When active  press the button     The system is automatically interrupted if    gt  The brakes are applied      gt  The clutch pedal is depressed for a few  seconds or released while a gear is not en   gaged      gt  The gear engaged is too high for the cur   rent speed      gt  Selector lever position D is disengaged     DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated  or DSC is deactivated     DSC is actively controlling stability      gt  When SPORT   is activated with Driving  Dynamics Control     Maintaining storing the current speed  SET Press the button     
36.  behind the vehicle is shown on the Control  Display     Hints    Check the traffic situation as well    Check the traffic situation around the ve   hicle with your own eyes  Otherwise  an acci   dent could result from road users or objects lo   cated outside the picture area of the backup  camera  lt     At a glance    Button in the vehicle       FPA Rearview camera  PY     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Driving comfort   Controls    Camera Display on the Control Display    Functional requirement   gt  The rearview camera is switched on    gt  The trunk lid is fully closed     Activating the assistance functions    More than one assistance function can be ac   tive at the same time         gt  Parking aid lines    Pe i        trunk lid  The image quality may be impaired      Parking aid lines  by dirt  Pathway and turning circle lines are dis   played     The camera lens is located in the handle of the    Clean the lens  refer to page 224    gt  Obstacle marking    Switching on off Pa  Obstacle marking     Spatially shaped markings are displayed   Switching on automatically    With the engine running  engage selector lever  position R     Pathway lines    The rearview camera image is displayed if the  system was switched on via the iDrive     Automatic deactivation during forward  travel   The system switches off when a certain driving  distance or speed is exceeded        Switch the system back on if necessary      gt  Can be shown in the rearview ca
37.  braking distance and altered self steering  properties   lt     Final tire failure    Vibrations or loud noises while driving  can indicate the final failure of the tire  Reduce  speed and stop  otherwise  pieces of the tire  could come loose and cause an accident  Do  not continue driving  and contact your service  center     Intelligent Safety    The concept    Depending on how the vehicle is equipped  In   telligent Safety consists of one or more of the  following systems  which can help to avoid an  imminent collision  These systems are active  automatically every time the engine is started  using the Start Stop button      gt  Collision warning  refer to page 103    gt  Pedestrian warning  refer to page 108     Note    Personal responsibility    The system does not serve as a substi   tute for the driver s personal judgment of the  traffic situation     Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi   cle s surroundings at all times  otherwise an  accident is still possible despite all warnings   lt     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Safety   Controls    Ata glance    Button in the vehicle         Intelligent Safety button          The camera is located near the base of the  mirror     Keep the windshield in the area behind the in   terior rear view mirror clean and clear     Switching on off   The Intelligent Safety systems are automati   cally active after each engine start via the start   stop button        Press the button  the systems are  s
38.  button of the  desired function on the hand held trans   mitter     5  Release both buttons as soon as the inte   rior rearview mirror LED flashes more rap   idly  When the LED is flashing faster  this    149    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Controls     Interior equipment    indicates that the button on the interior  rearview mirror has been programmed   The system can then be controlled by the  button on the interior rearview mirror     If the LED does not flash faster after at  least 60 seconds  change the distance and  repeat the step  Several more attempts at  different distances may be necessary  Wait  at least 15 seconds between attempts     Canada  if programming with the hand   held transmitter was interrupted  hold  down the interior rearview mirror button  and repeatedly press and release the  hand held transmitter button for 2 sec   onds     Controls    Before operation    Before operating a system using the  integrated universal remote control  ensure  that there are no people  animals  or objects  within the range of movement of the remote   controlled system  otherwise  there is a risk of  injury or damage    Also follow the safety instructions of the hand   held transmitter   lt     The system  such as the garage door  can be  operated using the button on the interior rear   view mirror while the engine is running or when  the ignition is started  To do this  hold down  the button within receiving range of the system  until the functi
39.  can be enlarged by folding  down the rear seat backrest     154    The rear seat backrest is divided into two parts  at a ratio of 60 to 40     If equipped with through loading system  the  rear seat backrest is divided in the ratio 40 20   AO     The sides can be folded down separately or to   gether     Hints  Danger of pinching       Before folding down the rear seat back   rests  ensure that the area of movement of the  backrests is clear  In particular  ensure that no  one is located in or reaches into the area of  movement of the rear seat backrests when the  middle section is folded down  Otherwise  in   jury or damage may result   lt     Ensuring the stability of the child seat       When installing child restraint fixing sys   tems  make sure that the child seat is securely  fastened to the backrest of the seat  The angle  of the backrest may need to be adjusted and   where necessary  the headrest height may also  need to be adjusted  or if possible removed   Make sure that all backrests are securely  locked  Otherwise  the stability of the child  seat is limited  and there is an increased risk of  injury because of unexpected movement of the  rear seat backrest   lt     Retract the head restraint if necessary  before backrest is folded down    With folding head restraints  fold in the head  restraints before folding down the backrests   or damage may result  lt     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Interior equipment   Controls    Opening Closi
40.  can be searched via search by pictures     This is helpful  for example  if the description of    an outfitting package that cannot be named is Leaf forward   needed  ac    Owner s Manual    Information and descriptions can be searched  by direct entry of a search term via the index     27  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14       Ataglance eMelreliasm integrated Owner s Manual in the vehicle    Context help   Owner s Manual to the Programmable memory buttons  temporarily selected function    The relevant information can be opened di  General information  rectly  The Owner s Manual can be stored on the pro   grammable memory buttons and called up di   Opening via the iDrive rectly   To move directly from the application on the  Control Display to the options menu  Storing  l 1   Owner s Manual  Select via the iDrive   IOPTION  Press the button or move the control  8  ler to the right repeatedly until the 2  W    Press the desired button for more   Options  menu is displayed  than 2 seconds   2   Display Owner s Manual  Executing  Opening when a Check Control Press the button   message is displayed   The Owner s Manual is displayed im   Directly from the Check Control message on mediately     the Control Display    Display Owner s Manual     Changing between a function and the  Owner s Manual    To change from a function  e g   radio  to the  Owner s Manual on the Control Display and to  switch between the two displays     ENON  Press the button or move the c
41.  cargo straps  retaining straps or    draw straps to the lashing eyes in the cargo  area     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Loading   Drivingtips tips       Securing cargo  gt  Distribute the roof load uniformly    Stow and secure the cargo as described  gt  The roof load should not be too large in  above  otherwise it may present a danger to area   the occupants  e g   during braking and avoid   gt  Always place the heaviest pieces on the    ance maneuvers   lt  bottom      gt  Secure the roof luggage firmly  e g   tie    with ratchet straps     Roof mounted luggage rack  gt  Do not let objects project into the opening    path of the trunk lid      gt  Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler   ation and braking maneuvers  Take corners  gently     Note  Roof racks are available as special accessories     Securing    Follow the installation instructions of the roof  rack     Roof drip rail with flaps       The anchorage points are located in the roof  drip rail above the doors     Fold the cover outward     Loading    Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained  for tilting and opening the glass sunroof     Because roof racks raise the vehicle s center  of gravity when loaded  they have a major ef   fect on vehicle handling and steering re   sponse     Therefore  note the following when loading  and driving      gt  Donot exceed the approved roof axle  loads and the approved gross vehicle  weight     167  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748 
42.  center is  approximately at ear level     Distance    Adjust the distance so that the head restraint  is as close as possible to the back of the head     If necessary  adjust the distance by adjusting  the tilt of the backrest     51    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Adjusting       Adjusting the height       1  Pull the head restraint upward as far as  possible      gt  To raise  pull   2  Press the button  arrow 1  and pull the     gt  To lower  press the button  arrow 1  and head restraint out completely     push the head restraint down   Before transporting passengers    Tilt Reinstall the head restraint before trans   porting anyone in the seat  otherwise  the pro   tective function of the head restraint is unavail   able  lt     Three different tilt positions are available     Rear head restraints    Correctly adjusted head restraint   A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the  risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event  of an accident         gt  Forward  pull the top edge of the head re     straint forward  arrow 1  Adjusting the head restraint   gt  Back  press the button  arrow 2  The head Correctly adjust the head restraints of all  restraint folds as far back as possible  occupied seats  otherwise  there is an in   creased risk of injury in an accident  lt   Removing  Only remove the head restraint if no one will be Height  sitting in the seat in question  Adjust the head restraint so that its center is  approximately at ear l
43.  cluster     On vehicles without a gear shift indicator  the  engaged gear is displayed     Manual transmission  displays    Description    Fuel efficient gear is engaged     Shift up to fuel efficient gear     Shift down to fuel efficient gear     Shift into neutral      9   3   Se    Automatic transmission  displays    Example Description    Fuel efficient gear is engaged     Shift into fuel efficient gear     RINE    Speed limit detection with  No Passing Information    The concept    Speed limit detection    Speed limit detection uses a symbol in the  shape of a traffic sign to display the currently  detected speed limit  The camera at the base  of the interior rearview mirror detects traffic  signs at the edge of the road as well as variable  overhead sign posts  Traffic signs with extra  symbols for wet road conditions  etc  are also  detected and compared with vehicle interior  data  such as for the rain sensor  and are dis   played depending on the situation  The system  takes into account the information stored in    81    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Controls     Displays    the navigation system and also displays speed  limits present on routes without signs     No Passing Information    No Passing Information in the instrument clus   ter displays the beginnings and ends of no  passing zones detected by the camera  The  system accounts for only the beginnings and  ends of No Passing zones marked by signs     No display is shown      gt  In
44.  could  lead to engine damage   lt       Reverse gear  Select only when the vehicle is stationary     To overcome the resistance move the selector  lever in a dynamic movement to the left and  engage the reverse gear     Automatic transmission with  Steptronic    Selector lever positions    D Drive  automatic position    Gear position for normal vehicle operation  All  forward gears are available     R is Reverse  Select only when the vehicle is stationary     N is Neutral    Use in automatic car washes  for example  The  vehicle can roll     When the ignition is switched off  refer to  page 61  selector lever position P is engaged  automatically     P Park    Select only when the vehicle is stationary  The  drive wheels are blocked     P is engaged automatically      gt  After the engine is switched off when the  vehicle is in radio ready state  refer to  page 62  or when the ignition is switched    69    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Controls     Driving    off  refer to page 61  and when position R  or D is engaged      gt  With the ignition off  if selector lever posi   tion N is engaged      gt  Ifthe safety belt is unbuckled  the driver s  door is opened  and the brake pedal is not  pressed while the vehicle is stationary and  position D or R is engaged     Before exiting the vehicle  make sure that se   lector lever position P of the automatic trans   mission is engaged  Otherwise  the vehicle  may begin to roll     Kickdown    Kickdown is used
45.  countries where No Passing zones are  primarily identified with road markings     On routes without signage      gt  Where there are railroad crossings  high   way markings or other situations where no  signage is present  but passing would not  be permitted     Hints    Personal judgment    The system cannot serve as a substitute  for the driver s personal judgment of the traffic  situation     The system assists the driver and does not re   place the human eye     Ata glance    Camera    Femme    S    Ma           The camera is located near the base of the  mirror     Keep the windshield in the area behind the in   terior rear view mirror clean and clear     82          Switching on off   1   Settings    2   Instr  cluster display    3   Speed limit information     If speed limit detection is switched on  it can  be displayed on the info display in the instru   ment cluster via the onboard computer     No Passing Information is displayed together  with the activated speed limit information     Display  The following is displayed in the instrument  cluster     Speed limit detection    Current speed limit     P    79    mph    Speed limit detection is not  available     Speed limit detection can also be displayed in  the Head up Display     No Passing Information     gt  Start of No Passing zone      gt  End of No Passing zone    gt  No Passing Information not  available     No Passing Information can also be displayed  in the Head up Display     System limits    The system 
46.  detection range      gt  Pedestrians having a body size less than  32 in 80 cm     Functional limitations    The system may not be fully functional or may  not be available in the following situations      gt  In heavy fog  rain  sprayed water or snow   fall     In tight curves      gt  If the camera view field or the front wind   shield are dirty or covered      gt  When driving toward bright lights     Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en   gine  via the Start Stop knob      gt  During calibration of the camera immedi   ately after vehicle shipment      gt  When it is dark outside     Lane departure warning    The concept    Starting at a specific speed  this system alerts  you when the vehicle on streets with lane  markings is about to leave the lane  This  speed  depending on the country version  is  between 35 mph 55 km h and   45 mph 70 km h     110    When switching on the system below this  speed  a message is displayed in the instru   ment cluster     The steering wheel begins vibrating gently in  the event of warnings  The time of the warning  may vary depending on the current driving sit   uation     The system does not provide a warning if the  turn signal is set before leaving the lane     Hints    Personal responsibility    The system cannot serve as a substitute  for the driver s personal judgment of the  course of the road and the traffic situation     In the event of a warning  do not jerk the steer   ing wheel  as you may lose control of the vehi   cl
47.  driver s safety belt is buckled or the  driver s door is closed    Manual transmission     gt  Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is  not pressed      gt  The driver s safety belt is buckled or the  driver s door is closed     The air flow of the air conditioner is reduced  when the engine is switched off     Displays in the instrument cluster    The READY display in the tach   ometer signals that the Auto  Start Stop function is ready to  start the engine automatically     The display indicates that the  conditions for an automatic en   gine stop have not been satis   fied     Note    The engine is not switched off automatically in  the following situations      gt  External temperature too low     63    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Controls   Driving     gt  The external temperature is high and auto   matic climate control is running      gt  The passenger compartment has not yet  been heated or cooled to the required  level      gt  The engine is not yet at operating temper   ature      gt  The wheels are at a sharp angle or the  steering wheel is being turned      gt  After driving in reverse     y    Fogging of the windows when the auto   matic climate control is switched on     Vehicle battery is heavily discharged   The engine compartment lid is unlocked   The parking assistant is activated   Stop and go traffic    The selector lever is in position N or M S     VV VV VO OV    Use of fuel with high ethanol content     Starting the engine 
48.  from a halt  your vehicle is  able to accelerate if operated accordingly     Even if some time passes before the vehicle  ahead of you drives away again  your own vehi   cle can still be accelerated automatically and  simply    As soon as the road is clear  it accelerates to  the desired speed     The speed is also maintained on downhill gra   dients  but may not be maintained on uphill  slopes if engine power is insufficient     General information    Depending on the set driving program  the  characteristics of the cruise control can  change in certain areas     Hints    Personal responsibility    Even an active system does not release  the driver from personal responsibility for the  driving process  especially for lane tracking   adaptation of speed  distance and driving style  to the traffic conditions     Because of technical system limits  the system  cannot independently react appropriately in all  traffic situations     Monitor the driving process  the surrounding  area and what is occurring in traffic continu   ously and attentively and actively intervene as  required  e g   by braking  steering or making  an evasive maneuver   lt     Unfavorable weather conditions    In the event of unfavorable weather and  light conditions  e  g  if there is rain  snowfall   slush  fog or glare  this may result in poorer  recognition of vehicles as well as short term  interruptions for vehicles that are already de   tected  Drive attentively  and react to the cur   rent traffic e
49.  from the tire  specialist or from your service center     Maximum speed for winter tires       Do not exceed the maximum speed for  the respective winter tires  otherwise  tire dam   age and accidents can occur     Run flat tires    If you are already using run flat tires  for your  own Safety you should replace them only with  the same kind  No spare tire is available in the  case of a flat tire  Your service center will be  glad to advise you     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Wheels and tires   Mobility      Rotating wheels between axles    Different wear patterns can occur on the front  and rear axles depending on individual driving  conditions  The tires can be rotated between  the axles to achieve even wear  Your service  center will be glad to advise you  After rotating   check the tire pressure and correct if neces   Sary    Rotating the tires is not permissible on vehi   cles with different tire sizes on the front and  rear axles  i e  when using different types of  tires     Storage    Store wheels and tires in a cool  dry place with  as little exposure to light as possible     Always protect tires against all contact with oil   grease and fuels     Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres   sure indicated on the side wall of the tire     Run flat tires       RSC label on the tire sidewall     The wheels are composed of special rims and  tires that are self supporting  to a limited de   gree     The support of the sidewall allows the ti
50.  gt  Thumbwheel to vary the temperature  ar   row 3     Toward blue  colder     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14       Toward red  warmer     Adjusting the ventilation   gt  Ventilation for cooling     Adjust the vent to direct the air in your di   rection  such as if the vehicle interior is hot  from the sun      gt  Draft free ventilation   Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you     Ventilation in the rear        gt  Thumbwheel for continuous opening and  closing of the vents  arrow 1      gt  Thumbwheel to vary the temperature  ar   row 2     Toward blue  colder   Toward red  warmer      gt  Lever for changing the air flow direction   arrow 3     Parked car ventilation    The concept    The parked car ventilation ventilates the vehi   cle interior and lowers its temperature  if nec   essary     The system can be switched on and off at any  external temperature  either directly or by us   ing two preset switch on times  It remains  switched on for 30 minutes     Open the vents to allow air to flow out     Climate control       Switching on off directly  1   Settings    2   Climate    3   Activate comf  ventilation      amp  The symbol on the automatic climate con   trol flashes if the system is switched on     Preselecting the switch on time  1   Settings    2   Climate    3   Timer 1  or Timer 2     4  Set the desired time     Activating the switch on time   1   Settings    2   Climate    3   Activate timer 1  or  Activate timer 2      amp  The sym
51.  in 3 mm     Winter tires    Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than  0 16 in 4 mm     Below a tread depth of 0 16 in 4 mm  tires are  less suitable for winter operation     Minimum tread depth       Wear indicators are distributed around the  tire s circumference and have the legally re   quired minimum height of 0 063 in 1 6 mm     They are marked on the side of the tire with  TWI  Tread Wear Indicator     Tire damage    General information    Inspect your tires often for damage  foreign  objects lodged in the tread  and tread wear     Notes    Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces   as well as debris  curbs and other obstacles  can cause serious damage to wheels  tires and  suspension parts  This is more likely to occur  with low profile tires  which provide less cush     ioning between the wheel and the road  Be  careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your  speed  especially if your vehicle is equipped  with low profile tires    Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de   fects      gt  Unusual vibrations during driving      gt  Unusual handling such as a strong ten   dency to pull to the left or right     Damage can  e  g   be caused by driving over  curbs  road damage  or similar things     In case of tire damage    If there are indications of tire damage  re   duce your speed immediately and have the  wheels and tires checked right away  other   wise  there is the increased risk of an accident     Drive carefully to the nearest service center   H
52.  in accordance with the age  weight and  size of the child  otherwise  there is an in   creased risk of injury in an accident     Children 13 years of age or older must wear a  safety belt as soon as a Suitable child restraint  fixing system can no longer be used  due to  their age  weight and size     Children on the front passenger seat    Should it ever be necessary to use a child re   straint fixing system in the front passenger  seat  make sure that the front  knee and side  airbags on the front passenger side are deacti     vated  Automatic deactivation of front passen   ger airbags  refer to page 96     Note    Deactivated front passenger airbags    If a child restraint fixing system is used in  the front passenger seat  the front passenger  airbags must be deactivated  otherwise  there  is an increased risk of injury to the child when  the airbags are triggered  even with a child re   straint fixing system     Installing child restraint  fixing systems    Before mounting    Before mounting child restraint fixing systems   ensure that the rear seat backrests are locked     Hints    Manufacturer s information for child re   straint fixing systems    To select  mount and use child restraint fixing  systems  observe the information provided by  the system manufacturer  otherwise  the pro   tective effect can be impaired  lt     Ensuring the stability of the child seat    When installing child restraint fixing sys   tems  make sure that the child seat is securely  fastened
53.  inflation pressure and after every tire or  wheel change     Vehicle Info     Vehicle status     Ll  Perform reset    Start the engine   do not drive away    Carry out the reset with  Perform reset      oo a SS oS    Drive away     The tires are shown in gray and the status is  displayed    After driving faster than 19 mph 30 km h for a  short period  the tire inflation pressures set are  accepted as reference values  The reset is  completed automatically during driving     After a successfully completed Reset  the  wheels on the Control Display are shown in  green and  Tire Pressure Monitor  TPM   active  is displayed     98    The trip can be interrupted at any time  If you  drive away again  the reset resumes automati   Cally     Low tire pressure message    The yellow warning lamp lights up  A         Check Control message is displayed    gt  There is aflat tire or a major loss in  tire inflation pressure      gt  No reset was performed for the system   The system therefore issues a warning  based on the tire inflation pressures before  the last reset     1  Reduce your speed and stop cautiously   Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu   vers     2  Check whether the vehicle is fitted with  regular tires or run flat tires     Run flat tires  refer to page 195  are la   beled with a circular symbol containing the  letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall     Do not continue driving without run flat  tires    Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not    equipped with r
54.  is inadequately burned  posing    62    a risk of overheating and damage to the cata   lytic converter     Do not wait for the engine to warm up while  the vehicle remains stationary  Start driving at  moderate engine speeds     Diesel engine    If the engine is cold and temperatures are be   low approx  32   F 0   C  the start process may  be delayed somewhat due to automatic pre   heating     A Check Control message is displayed   Automatic transmission    Starting the engine  1  Depress the brake pedal   2  Press the Start Stop button     The ignition is activated automatically for a  certain time and is stopped as soon as the en   gine starts     Manual transmission    Starting the engine  1  Depress the brake pedal     2  Press onthe clutch pedal and shift to neu   tral     3  Press the Start Stop button     The ignition is activated automatically for a  certain time and is stopped as soon as the en   gine starts     Engine stop    Hints    Take the remote control with you    Take the remote control with you when  leaving the vehicle so that children  for exam   ple  cannot start the engine   lt     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Driving   Controls    Set the parking brake and further secure  the vehicle as required       Set the parking brake firmly when parking  oth   erwise  the vehicle could roll  On steep upward  and downward inclines  further secure the ve   hicle  for example  by turning the steering  wheel in the direction of the curb   l
55.  is stored     Language  Setting the language    To set the language on the Control Display      Settings    Language Units    Language        ON Ss    Select the desired language     The setting is stored for the remote control  currently in use     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Displays   Controls    Setting the voice dialog Head up Display  Voice dialog for the voice activation system   refer to page 25  The concept    Units of measure    Setting the units of measure    To set the units for fuel consumption  route   distance and temperature      Settings        1   2   Language Units      3  Select the desired menu item  This system projects important information   4  Select the desired unit  into the driver s field of vision  e g   the speed   The setting is stored for the remote control The driver can get information without averting  currently in use  his or her eyes from the road    Brightness    Display visibility    Setting the brightness The visibility of the displays in the Head up    To set the brightness of the Control Display  Display is influenced by the following factors     l  gt  Certain sitting positions    Settings        gt  Objects on the cover of the Head up Dis     play    gt  Sunglasses with certain polarization filters      Control display    Brightness     Shy  gt     Turn the controller until the desired bright   ness is set      gt  Wet roads      gt  Unfavorable light conditions   5  Press the controller    S    If the im
56.  low the tachometer is backlit in  blue and is located at the zero    point  The tachometer approxi   mately indicates idle speed        The coasting point indicator is illuminated at  the zero point during coasting     Indications on the Control Display    The Coasting driving condition is displayed in  EfficientDynamics Info while this driving mode  Is active     The distance traveled in the Coasting driving  condition is indicated by a counter        Color code blue  arrow 1  and symbol  arrow 2   driving condition Coasting     Displaying EfficientDynamics info  1   Vehicle Info    2   EfficientDynamics    3  el  EfficientDynamics info     Deactivating the system manually  The function can be deactivated in the Config     ure ECO PRO  refer to page 170  menu  e g   to    use the braking effect of the engine when trav   eling downhill     The setting is stored for the profile currently in  use     ECO PRO driving style analysis    The concept    The system helps in this situation to develop  an especially efficient driving style and to con   serve fuel     For this purpose  the driving style is analyzed   The assessment is done in various categories  and is displayed on the Control Display     Using this indication  the individual driving  style can be oriented toward conserving fuel     The last fifteen minutes of a trip are evaluated     The range of the vehicle can be extended by  an efficient driving style     This gain in range is displayed as a bonus  range in the ins
57.  many individual  states  do not exceed the allowable washer  fluid dilution ratios limits that apply  Follow the  usage instructions on the washer fluid con     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14       tainer  Use BMW   s Windshield Washer Con   centrate or the equivalent     Washer fluid reservoir    Adding washer fluid    Only add washer fluid when the engine is  cool  and then close the cover completely to  avoid contact between the washer fluid and  hot engine parts     Otherwise  there is the danger of fire and a risk  to personal safety if the fluid is spilled  lt     i        Q   gt     All washer nozzles are supplied from one res   ervoir            Fill with a mixture of windshield washer con   centrate and tap water and   if required     with a  washer antifreeze  according to the manufac   turer s recommendations     Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain  the correct mixing ratio     Do not add windshield washer concentrate and  antifreeze undiluted and do not fill with pure  water  this could damage the wiper system     Do not mix window washer concentrates of dif   ferent manufacturers  because otherwise it can  result in clogging of the windshield washer  nozzles     Recommended minimun fill quantity  0 2 US  gal 1 liter     Driving       Manual transmission    Shifting  Shifting into 5th or 6th gear    When shifting into 5th or 6th gear  push  the gearshift lever to the right  otherwise inad   vertent shifting into the 3rd or 4th gear
58.  moved at low interior temperatures     Extending or retracting roller blind for  rear window    Press the button     Roller sunblinds for the rear side  windows    Pull out the roller sunblind at the loop and hook  it onto the bracket     Do not open the window while the roller  sunblind is raised     Do not open the window while the roller sun   blind is raised  otherwise  there is a risk of  damage at high speeds that may result in per   sonal injury     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Opening and closing   Controls    Glass sunroof  powered    General information  The glass sunroof is operational when the igni   tion is switched on    Keep the closing path clear    Monitor the closing process and make  sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof  is clear  otherwise  injuries may result     Take the remote control with you       Take the remote control with you when  leaving the vehicle so that children  for exam   ple  cannot operate the roof and injure them   selves        Tilting the glass sunroof  Push switch upward briefly      gt  Closed roof is tilted open      gt  The opened roof closes until  it is in its tilted position  The  sliding visor stays com   pletely open        Opening closing the glass sunroof and  sliding visor together     gt  Slide switch back to the re   sistance point and hold     Glass sunroof and sliding vi   sor open together as long as  the switch is held down         gt  Press switch back past the resistance  point
59.  object is small  a red  bar is shown in front of the vehicle  as it is in  the PDC display        The display appears as soon as Top View is  activated     When the image of the rearview camera is dis   played  it is possible to switch to top view     Rav  Rear view camera     Brightness  With Top View switched on     1     Select the symbol     2  Turn the controller until the desired setting  is reached  and press the controller     Contrast  With Top View switched on     1     Select the symbol     2  Turn the controller until the desired setting  is reached  and press the controller     Displaying the turning circle and  pathway lines     gt  The static  red turning circle line shows the  space needed to the side of the vehicle  when the steering wheel is turned all the  way     gt  The variable  green pathway line assists  you in assessing the amount of space ac   tually needed to the side of the vehicle     The lane line depends on the engaged  gear and the current steering angle  The    135    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Controls     Driving comfort    track line is continuously adjusted for the  steering wheel movement      7  Parking aid lines   Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed     System limits    Top View cannot be used in the following sit   uations      gt  With a door open     gt  With the trunk lid open     gt  With an exterior mirror folded in    gt  In poor light     A Check Control message is displayed in some  of th
60.  or front  passenger door completely  arrow     This corresponds to pressing the gf  button  on the remote control     Locking       Press the area on the door handle  arrow  with  your finger for approx  1 second without grasp   ing the door handle     This corresponds to pressing the  amp  button  on the remote control     To save battery power  ensure that the ignition  and all electronic systems and or power con   sumers are switched off before locking the ve   hicle     Convenient closing    Press the area on the door handle  arrow  with  your finger and hold it down     In addition to locking  the windows and the  glass sunroof are closed     39    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Controls     Opening and closing    Monitor the closing process    Monitor the closing process to ensure  that no one becomes trapped  lt     Unlocking the trunk lid separately  Press the button on the exterior of the trunk  lid    This corresponds to pressing the    but   ton on the remote control     Do not place the remote control in the  cargo area    Take the remote control with you and do not  leave it in the cargo area  otherwise  the re   mote control is locked inside the vehicle when  the trunk lid is closed  lt     Open trunk lid with no touch  activation    With Comfort Access  the trunk lid can be  opened with no touch activation using the re   mote control you are carrying     Two sensors detect a forward directed foot  motion in the center of the area at the
61.  quality  standards     US  ASTM 4806 xx  CAN  CGSB 3 511 xx    180    xx  comply with the current standard in each  case     Do not use a fuel with a higher percent   age of ethanol    Do not use a fuel with a higher ethanol per   centage than recommended or one with other  types of alcohol  i e  no Flex Fuel  otherwise  this could damage the engine and fuel supply  system     Recommended fuel grade  BMW recommends AKI 91     Minimum fuel grade  BMW recommends AKI 89     Minimum fuel grade    Do not use any gasoline below the mini   mum fuel grade as this may impair engine per   formance  lt     If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat   ing  the engine may produce knocking sounds  when starting at high outside temperatures   This has no effect on the engine life     Fuel quality    The use of poor quality fuels may result  in harmful engine deposits or damage  Addi   tionally  problems relating to drivability  start   ing and stalling  especially under certain envi   ronmental conditions such as high ambient  temperature and high altitude  may occur     If drivability problems are encountered  we rec   ommend switching to a high quality gasoline  brand and a higher octane grade     AKI num   ber     for a few tank fills  To avoid harmful en   gine deposits  it is highly recommended to  purchase gasoline from BP or Top Tier retail   ers     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Fuel   Mobility      Failure to comply with these recommendations  may resul
62.  rear of  the car and the trunk lid opens     Foot movement to be carried out    Do not touch vehicle       With the foot motion  make sure there is  steady stance and do not touch the vehicle   otherwise  there is a danger of injury  e  g  from  hot exhaust system parts     1  Place in the center behind the vehicle     about an arm s length from the vehicle rear     2  Move a foot in the direction of travel as far  under the vehicle as possible and immedi   ately pull it back  With this movement  the    40    leg must pass through the ranges of both  sensors        Opening  The trunk lid opens  regardless of whether it  was previously locked or unlocked     During opening  the trunk lid pivots back and  up  Ensure that adequate clearance is available  before opening     Before the opening  the hazard warning sys   tem flashes     Preventing inadvertent opening    In situations where the trunk lid should is  not to be opened with no touch activation  en   sure that the remote control is located beyond  the range of the sensor  at least 5 ft 1 50 m  from the rear of the car     Otherwise  the trunk lid may be opened inad   vertently  for example by an unintentional or  misinterpreted movement of the foot  lt     Malfunction    Comfort Access may not function properly if it  experiences interference from external sour   ces such as mobile phones  metal objects   overhead power lines  transmission towers   etc     In this case  open or close the vehicle using the  buttons on the
63.  remote control or use the  integrated key in the door lock     If there is a malfunction  open the trunk lid with  the remote control button or with the button on  the trunk lid     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Opening and closing   Controls    Adjusting    Unlocking   The setting is stored for the remote control  currently in use     Settings     Doors key      f Select symbol or  Unlock button      a SS    Select the desired function    gt   Driver s door only     Only the driver s door and the fuel filler  flap are unlocked  Pressing again un   locks the entire vehicle      gt   All doors   The entire vehicle is unlocked     Depending on how the vehicle is equipped or  the country specific variant  you can set  whether the doors are also unlocked with the  EY button on the remote control     Confirmation signals from the vehicle  The setting is stored for the remote control  currently in use    1   Settings    2   Doors key     3  Deactivate or activate the desired confir   mation signals      gt   Acoustic sig  lock unlock    gt   Flash when lock unlock     Automatic locking  The setting is stored for the remote control  currently in use   1   Settings   2   Doors key   3  Select the desired function    gt   Lock if no door is opened     The vehicle locks automatically after a  short period of time if a door is not  opened      gt   Lock after start driving     The vehicle locks automatically after  you drive away     Retrieving the seat and mir
64.  risk of collision  the system can as   sist with a slight braking intervention  The in   tervention can bring a vehicle traveling at slow  speed to a complete stop     Manual transmission  During a braking inter   vention up until reaching a complete stop  the  engine may be shut down     The braking intervention is executed only if  DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on  and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti   vated     The braking intervention can be interrupted by  pressing on the accelerator pedal or by actively  moving the steering wheel     Tow starting and towing    When tow starting and towing the vehi   cle  switch off the Intelligent Safety systems   otherwise  improper behavior of the braking  function of individual systems could result in  an accident     System limits    Be alert    Due to system limitations  warnings may  be not be issued at all  or may be issued late or  improperly  Therefore  always be alert and    109    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Controls     Safety    ready to intervene  otherwise  there is the dan   ger of an accident occurring  lt     Detection range    The detection capability of the camera is lim   ited     This may result in the warning not being is   sued or being issued late     For example  the following situations may not  be detected      gt  Partially covered pedestrians      gt  Pedestrians that are not detected as such  because of the viewing angle or contour     Pedestrians outside of the
65.  roof re   opens slightly if the closing force exceeds  a certain value    2  Press the switch forward again beyond the  resistance point and hold until the roof  closes without pinch protection  Make sure  that the closing area is clear     Closing from the raised position  without pinch protection    If there is an external danger  push the switch  forward past the resistance point and hold it     The roof closes without pinch protection     Initializing after a power failure    After a power failure during the opening or  closing process  the roof can only be operated  to a limited extent     Initializing the system    The system can be initialized when the vehicle  is stationary and the engine is running     During the initialization  the roof closes without  pinch protection     Keep the closing path clear       Monitor the closing process and make  sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof  is clear  otherwise  injuries may result         Press the switch up and hold it       until the initialization is com   plete         gt  Initialization begins within  15 seconds and is com   pleted when the sunroof is  completely closed      gt  The roof closes without pinch protection     46  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Adjusting   Controls    Adjusting    Vehicle equipment    All standard  country specific and optional  equipment that is offered in the model series is  described in this chapter  Therefore  equip   ment is also described that is no
66.  such as gravel  roads      gt  On slippery ground     When leaves or snow has collected in the  parking space     Limits of ultrasonic measurement    The detection of objects can reach the physi   cal limits of ultrasonic measurement  e g   in  the following circumstances      gt  For small children and animals      gt  For persons with certain clothing  e g   coats     139    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Controls     Driving comfort     gt  If there is an external disturbance of the ul   trasound  e g  from passing vehicles or  loud machines      gt  When sensors are dirty  iced over  dam   aged or out of position      gt  Under certain weather conditions  such as  high relative humidity  rain  snowfall ex   treme heat or strong wind      gt  With tow bars and trailer hitches of other  vehicles     With thin or wedge shaped objects    gt  With moving objects     With elevated  protruding objects such as  ledges or cargo     With objects with corners and sharp edges      gt  With objects with a fine surface structure   such as fences      gt  For objects with porous surfaces     Low objects already displayed  e g   curbs  can  move into the blind area of the sensors before  or after a continuous tone sounds     The parking assistant may identify parking  spaces that are not suitable for parking     Malfunction  A Check Control message is displayed     The parking assistant failed  Have the system  checked     140  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2
67.  switch off the AUTO program first       Press the left or right side of the but   ton  decrease or increase air flow        The selected air flow is shown on the display of  the automatic climate control     The air flow of the automatic climate control  may be reduced automatically to save battery  power     Rear window defroster    Press the button     The rear window defroster switches  off automatically after a certain period of time     Defrosting windows and removing  condensation  J Press the button     Ice and condensation are quickly re   moved from the windshield and the front side  windows     The air volume can be adjusted when the pro   gram is active     If the windows are fogged over  you can also  switch on the cooling function or press the    146    AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen   sor     Switching the system on off    Switching off    apy Press the left button for the minimum    speed     Switching on   Press any button except    gt  Rear window defroster    gt  Seat heating     Microfilter activated charcoail filter    In external and recirculated air mode the mi   crofilter activated charcoal filter filters dust   pollen  and gaseous pollutants out of the air     This filter should be replaced during scheduled  maintenance  refer to page 202  of your vehi   cle     Ventilation    Front ventilation        gt  Lever for changing the air flow direction   arrow 1      gt  Thumbwheels for opening and closing the  vents continuously  arrows 2     
68.  switched on  the conden   sation evaporates after a short time  The head   lamp glasses do not need to be changed     If the headlamps do not dim despite driving  with the light switched on  increasing humidity  forms  e  g  water droplets in the light  have the  service center check this     Headlamp setting  The headlamp adjustments can be affected by    changing lamps and bulbs  Therefore after a  change  have the headlamp setting checked  and corrected by Service    Front lamps  bulb replacement  Halogen headlamps    Headlamps       Parking lamps    High beams headlamp flasher  Low beams  Turn signal    a fF QOQ N      Daytime running lights    Accessing the turn signals and low beams  Follow general instructions  refer to page 204     205    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14       Mobility Replacing components    Low beams  55 watt bulb  H7     1  Turn the cap counterclockwise and re   move         In the wheel house  loosen the two brackets  and remove the cover     Turn signal  21 watt bulb  PY21W       2  Tilt the bulb down and then up to loosen it  1  If necessary  pull the inside trim of the from the holder and remove   wheel house slightly inward  Turn the bulb l  holder counterclockwise and remove            3  Pullthe connector off the bulb    Attach the connector to the new bulb    First insert the bulb at the top with the  strap  arrow 1  and then press down firmly   arrow 2  Make sure that the bulb snaps into  place                 2  Press 
69.  systems could result in  an accident  lt     Display in the instrument cluster    The collision warning can be issued in the in   strument cluster  in the Head up Display  and  acoustically     Warning stages    Symbol Measure    The vehicle lights up red  prewarn   Ing   Increase distance     The vehicle flashes red and an  acoustic signal sounds  acute warn   Ing    You are requested to intervene by  braking or making an evasive ma   neuver     BD  D    Adapting your speed and driving style    The display does not relieve the driver of  the responsibility to adapt his or her driving  speed and style to the traffic conditions  lt     System limits    Be alert    Due to system limitations  warnings may  be not be issued at all  or may be issued late or  improperly  Therefore  always be alert and  ready to intervene  otherwise  there is the dan   ger of an accident occurring  lt     Detection range  The system s detection capabilities are limited     107    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Controls     Safety    This may result in the warning not being is   sued or being issued late     For example  the following situations may not  be detected      gt  Slow moving vehicles when you approach  them at high speed      gt  Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of  you or sharply decelerating vehicles     Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance   Two wheeled vehicles ahead of you   Pedestrians     VV V OV    Stationary objects     Functional limitations   
70.  the ignition is  switched off     Fuel gauge      The vehicle inclination may  TE Cause the display to vary   A    0                US models  the arrow beside the  fuel pump symbol shows which  side of the vehicle the fuel filler       flap is on   Hints on refueling  refer to page 178     Tachometer    Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning  field  In this range  the fuel supply is inter   rupted to protect the engine     Engine oil temperature     gt  Cold engine  the pointer is at  the low temperature end   Drive at moderate engine  and vehicle speeds         gt  Normal operating tempera   ture  the pointer is in the  middle or in the left half of  the temperature display      gt  Hot engine  the pointer is at the high end of  the temperature range  A Check Control  message is also displayed     Coolant temperature    If the coolant along with the engine becomes  too hot  a Check Control message is displayed     Check the coolant level  refer to page 201     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Displays   Controls    Date    Odometer and trip odometer    Display        gt  Odometer  arrow 1     at Baa  gt  Trip odometer  arrow 2     43955 223 5    Show reset kilometers       Press the knob       gt  When the ignition is   lt   N switched off  the time  the      external temperature and  the odometer are displayed    gt  When the ignition is switched on  the trip  odometer is reset     External temperature    If the indicator drops to   37   F  3 
71.  the ignition is switched off    gt  After approx  15 minutes     Headlamps   gt  Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or  caustic cleansers      gt  Soak areas that have been soiled e g  due  to insects  with shampoo and wash off with  water      gt  Thaw ice with deicing spray  do not use an  ice scraper     After washing the vehicle    After washing the vehicle  apply the brakes  briefly to dry them  otherwise  braking action  can be reduced and corrosion of the brake  discs can occur     222    Completely remove all residues on the win   dows  to minimize loss of visibility due to  smearing and to reduce wiper noises and  wiper blade wear     Vehicle care    Car care products    BMW recommends using cleaning and care  products from BMW  since these have been  tested and approved     Car care and cleaning products  Follow the instructions on the container     When cleaning the interior  open the doors or  windows     Only use products intended for cleaning vehi   cles     Cleansers can contain substances that are  dangerous and harmful to your health     Vehicle paint    Regular care contributes to driving safety and  value retention  Environmental influences in  areas with elevated air pollution or natural con   taminants  such as tree resin or pollen can af   fect the vehicle s paintwork  Tailor the fre   quency and extent of your car care to these  influences     Aggressive substances  such as spilled fuel   oil  grease or bird droppings  must be removed  immediately 
72.  the model series is  described in this chapter  Therefore  equip   ment is also described that is not available in a  vehicle  e  g   because of the selected optional  equipment or country variant  This also applies  for safety related functions and systems     Notes    No loose objects in the passenger com   partment    Do not stow any objects in the passenger  compartment without securing them  other   wise  they may present a danger to occupants  for instance during braking and avoidance ma   neuvers  lt     Do not place anti slip mats on the dash   board    Do not place anti slip mats on the dashboard   The mat materials could damage the dash   board        Storage compartments  The following storage compartments are avail   able in the vehicle interior      gt  Glove compartment on the front passenger  side  refer to page 156      gt  Glove compartment on the driver s side   refer to page 157      gt  Without Smoker s package  Front storage  compartment  in front of the cupholders   refer to page 157      gt  Storage compartment in the front center  armrest  refer to page 157     156     gt  Compartments in the doors  refer to  page 157      gt  Nets on the backrests of the front seats      gt  Storage compartment in the rear center  console  refer to page 158     Glove compartment  Front passenger side    Note    Close the glove compartment again im   mediately    Close the glove compartment immediately af   ter use while driving  otherwise  injury may oc   cur during 
73.  to achieve maximum driving  performance  Press on the accelerator pedal  beyond the resistance point at the full throttle  position     Engaging selector lever positions     gt  Itis not possible to shift out of selector  lever position P until the engine is running  and the brake is applied      gt  With the vehicle stationary  press on the  brake pedal before shifting out of P or N   otherwise  the shift command will not be  executed  shift lock     Press on the brake pedal until you  start driving       To prevent the vehicle from creeping after  you select a gear  maintain pressure on the  brake pedal until you are ready to start  lt     70       Engaging D  R and N    Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di   rection  beyond a resistance point if necessary     After releasing the selector lever  it returns to  its center position        Press unlock button  in order to    gt  Engage R    gt  Shift out of P     Engaging P       Press button P     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14       Sport program and manual mode    Activating the sport program       Press the selector lever to the left out of selec   tor lever position D     The sport program of the transmission is acti   vated     Activating the M S manual mode  1  Press the selector lever to the left out of  selector lever position D     2  Push the selector lever forward or pull it  backward     Manual mode becomes active and the gear is  changed     The engaged gear is displayed in the 
74.  to the backrest of the seat  The angle  of the backrest may need to be adjusted and   where necessary  the headrest height may also  need to be adjusted  or if possible removed   Make sure that all backrests are securely  locked  Otherwise  the stability of the child  seat is limited  and there is an increased risk of  injury because of unexpected movement of the  rear seat backrest        57    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Transporting children safely    ED eoori children safely    On the front passenger seat    Deactivating airbags    After installing a child restraint fixing system in  the front passenger seat  make sure that the  front  knee and side airbags on the front pas   senger side are deactivated     Deactivate the front passenger airbags auto   matically  refer to page 96     Deactivating the front passenger airbags    If a child restraint fixing system is used in  the front passenger seat  the front passenger  airbags must be deactivated  otherwise  there  is an increased risk of injury to the child when  the airbags are triggered  even with a child re   straint fixing system     Seat position and height    Before installing a child restraint fixing system   move the front passenger seat as far back as  possible and adjust its height to the highest  position to obtain the best possible position for  the belt and to offer optimal protection in the  event of an accident     If the upper fixing point of the safety belt is lo   cated befor
75.  top of the previ   main menu     ous display         Manual  CARIVARI  ENERGY    GONG96 3  KLASSIK   100 0 MHz  101 3 MHz       18  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    iDrive   Ataglance     a glance    White arrows pointing to the left or right indi   cate that additional panels can be opened     View of an opened menu    When a menu is opened  it generally opens  with the panel that was last selected in that  menu  To display the first panel of a menu      gt  Move the controller to the left repeatedly  until the first panel is displayed      gt  Press the menu button on the controller  twice     Opening the Options menu    Press the button        The  Options  menu is displayed   4    vr Options  LY Split screen  Switch off control display  FM  Display Owner s Manual    QO HD Radio reception  O RDS  Radio    Additional options  move the controller to the  right repeatedly until the  Options  menu is  displayed     Options menu    The  Options  menu consists of various areas      gt  Screen settings  e g    Split screen    This area remains unchanged      gt  Control options for the selected main  menu  e g   for  Radio       gt  If applicable  further operating options for  the selected menu  e g    Store station      Changing settings  1  Selecta field           2  Turn the controller until the desired setting  is displayed      5 Volume settings    Speed volume    Volume setting     PDC        Gong          3  Press the controller     Activating deact
76.  unnecessary  electronic systems power consumers     Note    If the engine is switched off and the ignition is  switched on  the system automatically  switches to the radio ready state when the  door is opened if the lights are switched off or  the daytime running lights are switched on     Ignition off  Automatic transmission  Press the Start Stop  button again  but do not depress the brake     Manual shift transmission  press the Start   Stop button again  and do not press on the  clutch pedal at the same time     All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go  out     To save battery power when the engine is off   switch off the ignition and any unnecessary  electronic systems power consumers     P when the ignition is switched off    P is engaged automatically when the ig   nition is switched off  When in an automatic car  wash  for example  ensure that the ignition is  not switched off accidentally  lt     The ignition automatically cuts off while the  vehicle is stationary and the engine is stopped      gt  When locking the vehicle  and when the  low beams are activated      gt  Shortly before the battery is discharged  completely  so that the engine can still be  started  This function is only available  when the low beams are switched off      gt  When opening or closing the driver door  if  the driver s seat belt is unbuckled and the  low beams are switched off      gt  While the driver s seat belt is unbuckled  if  the driver s door is open and the low  beams are 
77.  up to a max  of  50 mph   80 km h    4 2 60    328i xDrive  328d xDrive    Tire size    Specifications in  bar PSI with cold  tires    225 50 R 17 94 V  M S A S RSC    225 50 R 17 94 H  M S RSC    Pressure specifications  in bar PSI    RERF R O            2 2   32 2 2132    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Tire size    225 45 R 1891 V  M S A S RSC    225 45 R 1891 Y  RSC    225 45 R 18 95 V  M S XL RSC    Front  225 50 R 17  94 W RSC   Rear  255 45 R 17  98 W RSC   Front  225 45 R 18  91 Y RSC   Rear  255 40 R 18  95 Y RSC   Front  225 40 R 19  89 Y RSC   Rear  255 35 R 19  92 Y RSC   Front  225 35 R 20  90 Y XL RSC   Rear  255 30 R 20  92 Y XL RSC  Compact wheel    T 135 80 R 17 102  M    Pressure specifications  in bar PSI    2 2   32 2 4135  2 2  32      2 4135  2 2   32      2 2  32  2 2  32      2 4135  2 5 36      3 0  44    Speed up to a max  of  50 mph   80 km h    4 2160    187    Mobility   Wheels and tires    3351  3351 xDrive relevant table on the following pages  Other   wise tire damage and accidents could occur  lt     Tire size Pressure specifications    in bar PS  Tire inflation pressure values over  Specifications in ft       Heh lp 100 mph 160 km h    bar PSI with cold l  tires 3201  320i xDrive          E  lt  Without high speed tuning feature  225145R1891V 22132 Tire size Pressure specifications  M S A S RSC in bar PSI  225 45 R 18 91 Y Specifications in  RSC bar PSI with cold RERF   225 50 R 17 94 H tires G  M S RSC e  225 45 R 18 
78.  used to  adjust the certain characteristics of the vehicle   Various programs can be selected for this pur   pose  The Driving Dynamics Control and the  DSC OFF buttons can each be used to activate  a program     Operating the programs    Press the button     OFF    oe    Program    DSC OFF  TRACTION    SPORT   SPORT  COMFORT  ECO PRO             116       Automatic program change    The system automatically switches to COM   FORT in the following situations      gt  Failure of DSC Dynamic Stability Control    gt  The vehicle has a flat tire      gt  When activating cruise control in TRAC   TION or DSC OFF mode     DSC OFF    When DSC OFF  refer to page 114  is active   driving stability is limited during acceleration  and when driving in bends     TRACTION    When TRACTION is active  the vehicle has  maximum traction on loose road surfaces  DTC  Dynamic Traction Control  refer to page 115  is  activated  Driving stability is limited during ac   celeration and when driving in bends     SPORT     Sporty driving with optimized chassis and  adapted engine control with limited driving sta   bilization     Dynamic Traction Control is switched on     The driver handles several of the stabilization  tasks     Activating SPORT      i  Press the button repeatedly until  SPORT  appears in the instrument  cluster and the DSC OFF indicator lamp lights    up     Automatic program change    When activating cruise control  the program  automatically switches to SPORT mode     Indicator war
79.  with part 15 of the FCC    Rules  Operation is subject to the following  two conditions      gt  This device may not cause harmful inter   ference  and     gt  this device must accept any interference  received  including interference that may  cause undesired operation     Any unauthorized modifications or changes to  these devices could void the user s authority to  operate this equipment     113  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Controls     Driving stability control systems    Driving stability control systems    Vehicle equipment    All standard  country specific and optional  equipment that is offered in the model series is  described in this chapter  Therefore  equip   ment is also described that is not available in a  vehicle  e  g   because of the selected optional  equipment or country variant  This also applies  for safety related functions and systems     Antilock Brake System ABS    ABS prevents locking of the wheels during  braking    The vehicle remains steerable even during full  brake applications  thus increasing active  Safety    ABS is operational every time you start the en   gine     Brake assistant    When you apply the brakes rapidly  this system  automatically produces the maximum braking  force boost  This then reduces braking dis   tance to a minimum during full braking  This  system utilizes all of the benefits provided by  ABS    Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal  for the duration of the full braking     DSC Dyna
80.  without run flat  tires    Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not  equipped with run flat tires  continued driving  may result in serious accidents   lt     When a flat tire is indicated  DSC Dynamic Sta   bility Control is switched on if necessary     System limits  Sudden tire damage    Sudden serious tire damage caused by  external influences cannot be indicated in ad   vance  lt     A natural  even pressure loss in all four tires  cannot be detected  Therefore  check the tire  inflation pressure regularly     The system could be delayed or malfunction in  the following situations      gt  When the system has not been initialized      gt  When driving ona snowy or slippery road  surface      gt  Sporty driving style  slip in the drive  wheels  high lateral acceleration      gt  When driving with snow chains   Actions in the event of a flat tire    Normal tires  1  Identify the damaged tire     Do this by checking the air pressure in all  four tires     101    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Controls     Safety    If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires  is correct  the Flat Tire Monitor may not  have been initialized  In this case  initialize  the system     If an identification is not possible  please  contact the service center     2  Rectify the flat tire   Run flat tires    Maximum speed    You can continue driving with a damaged tire  at speeds up to 50 mph 80 km h     Continued driving with a flat tire  If continuing to drive w
81. 2 925 748   11 14    Transporting children safely   Controls    Note    Follow manufacturer s information for  LATCH child restraint fixing systems    To mount and use the LATCH child restraint  fixing systems  observe the operating and  safety information from the system manufac   turer  otherwise  the level of protection may be  reduced  lt     Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors    The lower anchors may be used to attach the  CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child  and CRS weight of 65 lb 30 kg when the child  is restrained by the internal harnesses     Correctly engage the lower LATCH an   chors    Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have  properly engaged and that the child restraint  fixing system is resting snugly against the  backrest  otherwise  the degree of protection  offered may be reduced   lt     Before mounting the LATCH child restraint fix   ing system  pull the belt away from the child  restraint fixing system     Without a through loading system   Position       Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are lo   cated in the gap between the seat and back   rest        With a through loading system   Position       Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are lo   cated behind the indicated covers     Mounting ISOFIX child restraint fixing  systems    1  Mount the child restraint fixing system  re   fer to the user s manual of the system     2  Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop   erly connected     Child restraint fixing system with a  tether strap    Mou
82. 20i  320i xDrive       Specifications i  parbsiwithcod  RERE R D    tires    O     0          pe  225 50 R 17 94 V  M S A S RSC  225 50 R 17 94 H  M S RSC  225 45 R 18 91 V  M S A S RSC    225 45 R 18 91 Y  RSC    225 45 R 18 95 V  M S XL RSC    Front  225 50 R 17  94 W RSC    Rear  255 45 R 17  98 W RSC    2 2  32 2 2  32    2 2  32 2 4135    2 2  32      2 41 35       186       Front  225 45R18 2 2 32     91 Y RSC 221 32  Rear  255 40 R 18   95 Y RSC    Front  225 40 R 19  89 Y RSC   Rear  255 35 R 19  92 Y RSC   Front  225 35 R 20  90 Y XL RSC    Rear  255 30 R 20  92 Y XL RSC    2 2  32    2 41 35    2 5   36      3 0  44    Compact wheel Speed up to a max  of    T 135 80 R 17 102 50 mph   80 km h  M 4 2160       328i  328d       Saee     maiSiwithcod DAEA TERI   tires G  P4    225 50R1794V 2 2 32    M S A S RSC  225 50 R 17 94 H  M S RSC  225 45 R 18 91 V  M S A S RSC  225 45 R 18 91 Y  RSC    225 45 R 18 95 V  M S XL RSC    2 2  32    2 2  32 2 41 35       Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Wheels and tires   Mobility      Tire size    Front  225 50 R 17  94 W RSC    Rear  255 45 R17  98 W RSC   Front  225 45 R18  91 Y RSC   Rear  255 40 R 18  95 Y RSC   Front  225 40 R 19  89 Y RSC   Rear  255 35 R 19  92 Y RSC   Front  225 35 R 20  90 Y XL RSC   Rear  255 30 R 20  92 Y XL RSC  Compact wheel    T 135 80 R 17 102  M    Pressure specifications  in bar PSI   2 21 32       2 2  32  2 21 32       22  32  2 21 32       2 4135  2 5 36       3 0 44    Speed
83. 25 748   11 14       Mobility   Replacing components    Daytime running lights Headlamps  24 watt bulb  PW24W     1  If necessary  remove the high beam bulb  connector     2  Remove the bulb holder        1 Parking lamps   daytime running lights    2 Low beams high beams headlamp flasher  3 Turn signal       Low beams and high beams are designed with    3  Remove the bulb from the bulb holder  xenon technology   4  To insert the new bulb  proceed in reverse The parking lamps and daylight running lights  order of removal  During insertion  the bot  are made using LED technology     tom of the bulb holder must be facing    Contact your service center in the event of a  downward  Make sure that the bulb holder y      malfunction   snaps into place   5  Attach the high beam bulb connector  Turn signal  6  Close the headlamp housing with the cap  Follow general instructions  refer to page 204     Make sure that the cap engages   Xenon headlamps    Xenon headlamps    Because of the long life of these bulbs  the  likelihood of failure is very low  Switching the  lamps on and off frequently shortens their life     If a bulb fails  switch on the front fog lamps and  continue the trip with great care  Comply with  local regulations     Do not perform work bulb replacement  on xenon headlamps    Have any work on the xenon lighting system   including bulb replacement  performed only by  a service center  Due to the high voltage  present in the system  there is the danger of  fatal injuri
84. 4 490   Printed on environmentally friendly paper  bleached  without chlorine  suitable for recycling     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Contents    The fastest way to find information on a partic   ular topic or item is by using the index  refer to  page 232     6 Notes  Ata glance  12 Cockpit  16 iDrive    24 Voice activation system  27 Integrated Owner s Manual in the vehicle    Controls   32 Opening and closing   47 Adjusting   57 Transporting children safely    61 Driving  73 Displays  89 Lamps  94 Safety    114 Driving stability control systems  119 Driving comfort   141 Climate control   148 Interior equipment   156 Storage compartments    Driving tips   162 Things to remember when driving  165 Loading   168 Saving fuel    Mobility   178 Refueling   180 Fuel   185 Wheels and tires   196 Engine compartment  198 Engine oil   201 Coolant   202 Maintenance   204 Replacing components  215 Breakdown assistance  221 Care   Reference   228 Technical data   232 Everything from AtoZ    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14       _ Notes    Notes    Using this Owner s Manual    Orientation    The fastest way to find information on a partic   ular topic is by using the index     An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in  the first chapter     Updates made after the editorial  deadline    Any updates made after the editorial deadline  for the Owner s Manuals are located in the ap   pendix of the printed quick reference for the  vehicle 
85. 5 748   11 14    Opening and closing   Controls    Without remote control From the inside    From the outside Locking and unlocking    Locking from the outside    Do not lock the vehicle from the outside  if there are people in it  as the vehicle cannot  be unlocked from inside without special knowl   edge  lt     Remove the key before pulling the door  handle    Before pulling the outside door handle  remove   the key to avoid damaging the paintwork and Pressing the button for the central locking sys   the key    tem locks and unlocks the doors and the trunk  lid when the front doors are closed  but they  are not secured against theft        The fuel filler flap remains unlocked     In the event of an accident of corresponding  severity  the vehicle is automatically unlocked   The hazard warning system and interior lamps  come on        Unlocking and opening  Unlock or lock the driver s door via the door  lock using the integrated key  The other doors  must be unlocked or locked from the inside     Alarm system    The alarm system is not armed if the vehicle is  locked with the integrated key        The alarm system is triggered when the door is  opened  if the vehicle was unlocked via the  door lock  In order to terminate this alarm  un   lock vehicle with the remote control or switch  on the ignition  if necessary  by emergency de   tection of the remote control      gt  Either unlock the doors together using the  button for the central locking system and  then pull the do
86. 8 91 Y  RSC    225 45 R 18 95 V M     S XL RSC    2 6 38    Pressure specifications  in bar PSI       RERER O           Front  225 50R17 9 2 4 35      94 W RSC    Rear   255 45 R 17 98 W  RSC      2 6 38    Front  225 45R18 2 6 38      91 Y RSC    Rear   255 40 R 18 95 Y  RSC    190      2 6 38    Tire size    Front  225 40 R 19  89 Y RSC    Rear   255 35 R 19 92 Y  RSC    Front  225 35 R 20  90 Y XL RSC   Rear  255 30 R 20  92 Y XL RSC  Compact wheel    T 135 80 R 17 102  M    335i  335i xDrive    Pressure specifications  in bar PSI   2 6 38       2 8 41  2 7139       3 2 46    Speed up to a max  of  50 mph   80 km h    4 2160    Without high speed tuning feature    Tire size    Specifications in  bar PSI with cold  tires    225 45 R 18 91 V  M S A S RSC    225 45 R 18 91 Y  RSC    225 50 R 17 94 H  M S RSC    225 45 R 18 95 V  M S XL RSC  Front  225 45 R 18  91 Y RSC    Rear  255 40 R 18  95 Y RSC    Pressure specifications  in bar PSI    RARER O    4 4  2 7 139 3 2 1 46  2  139      2 81 41    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Wheels and tires   Mobility    Tire size Pressure specifications  in bar PSI   Front  225 40R19 2 71 39     89 Y RSC f 3 0  44   Rear  255 35 R 19   92 Y RSC   Front  225 35 R20 2 9 42     90 Y XL RSC 34149   Rear  255 30 R 20   92 Y XL RSC   Compact wheel Speed up to a max  of    T 135 80 R 17 102 50 mph 80 km h  M 4 2160    With high speed tuning feature    Pressure specifications    in bar PSI  Specifications in    bar PSI wit
87. 95 V 225 50R1794V 2 21 32  M S XL RSC M S A S RSC  Front  225 45 R18 2 2 32   225 50 R 17 94 H  91 Y RSC i 24135 M S RSC  Rear  255 40 R 18 225 45R1891V 2 41 35 2 9 142  95 Y RSC M S A S RSC  Front  225 40R19 2 4 35   225 45 R 1891 Y  89 Y RSC 26 38 RSC  Rear  255 35 R 19 225 45 R 18 95 V  92 Y RSC M S XL RSC  Front  225 35 R20 2 6 38   Front  225 50R17 2 2 32    90 Y XL RSC 30 44 94 W RSC 2 4135  Rear  255 30 R 20 Rear  255 45 R 17  92 Y XL RSC 98 W RSC  Compact wheel Speed up to a max  of Front  225 45R18 2 4 35    T 135 80 R 17 102 50 mph   80 km h 91 Y RSC   2 4135  M 4 2 160 Rear  255 40 R 18  95 Y RSC  Tire inflation pressures at max  Front  225 40R19 2 41 35    speeds above 100 mph 160 km h 89 Y RSC E 26 38  Speeds above 100 mph 160 km h Rear  255 35 R 19  92 Y RSC    In order to drive at maximum speeds in    excess of 100 mph 160 km h  please observe     and  if necessary  adjust tire pressures for    speeds exceeding 100 mph 160 km h from the    188    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14       Wheels and tires   Mobility         Tire size Pressure specifications Tire size Pressure specifications  in bar PSI in bar PSI  Front  225 35R20 2 5 36   Front  225 35R20 2 5 36    90 Y XLRSC   30 44 90 Y XLRSC f 30144  Rear  255 30 R 20 Rear  255 30 R 20  92 Y XL RSC 92 Y XL RSC  Compact wheel Speed up to a max  of Compact wheel Speed up to a max  of  T 135 80 R 17102 50 mph   80 km h T 135 80 R 17102 90 mph   80 km h  M 4 2160 M 4 2160  With high speed tuning 
88. CD Multimedia  menu    NAV Opens the Navigation menu     17    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    HEEE  iDrive    Buttons on controller Selecting menu items  Highlighted menu items can be selected           Press the but  Function  ton 1  Turn the controller until the desired menu    item is highlighted     MENU Open the main menu      Main menu  Audio Open audio menu last lis    ad  tened to  switch between au    Radio  dio menus    Telephone  TEL Opens the Telephone menu  bang anew    Office    BACK Open previous panel  Po E   f Vehicle Info    fi Vehicle Info  f Settings    a    OPTION Opens the Options menu        2  Press the controller     Operating concept Menu items in the Owner s Manual   In the Owner s Manual  menu items that can be  selected are set in quotation marks  e g     Press the button   Settings      Opening the main menu    MENU       Changing between panels    After a menu item is selected  e g    Radio   a  new panel is displayed  Panels can overlap       a  L at    A SE Main menu  Multimedia  Radio  Telephone  gt  Move the controller to the left       Navigation The current panel is closed and the previ     Office ous panel is displayed       Vehicle Info The previous panel is opened again by    Settings pressing the BACK button  In this case  the  current panel is not closed        The main menu is displayed     _ l l  gt  Move the controller to the right   All iDrive functions can be called up via the      A new panel is opened on
89. CO PRO Tip    gt   Tip at     Set ECO Pro speed at which an ECO PRO  Tip is to be displayed     gt   ECO PRO speed warning      A reminder is displayed if the set ECO PRO  speed is exceeded     Coasting   Fuel efficiency can be optimized by disengag   ing the engine and Coasting  refer to   page 172  with the engine idling    This function is only available in ECO PRO  mode     ECO PRO climate control   ECO PRO climate control     The climate control is adjusted to be fuel effi   cient     By making a slight change to the set tempera   ture  or slowly adjusting the rate of heating or  cooling of the passenger compartment  fuel  consumption can be economized     The outputs of the seat heater and the exterior  mirror heating are also reduced     The exterior mirror heating is made available  when outside temperatures are very cold     ECO PRO potential    The percentage of potential savings that can  be achieved with the current configuration is  displayed     Display in the instrument cluster    ECO PRO bonus range    An extension of the range can  be achieved by an adjusted driv   ing style         a This may be displayed as the  bonus range in the instrument  cluster     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Saving fuel   Drivingtips tips    The bonus range Is shown in the range display     The bonus range is automatically reset every  time the vehicle is refueled     Driving style       In the tachometer  a mark in the bar display in   dicates the current 
90. Controls    DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator lamp go  out     Indicator warning lamps    When DSC is deactivated  DSC OFF is dis   played in the instrument cluster         amp    The indicator lamp lights up  DSC is  oe deactivated     DTC Dynamic Traction  Control    The concept    The DTC system is a version of the DSC in  which forward momentum is optimized     The system ensures maximum forward mo   mentum on special road conditions  e g   unp   lowed snowy roads  but driving stability is lim   ited     It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri   ate caution     You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC  under the following special circumstances      gt  When driving in slush or on uncleared   snow covered roads      gt  When rocking the vehicle or driving off in  deep snow or on loose surfaces      gt  When driving with snow chains     Deactivating activating DTC Dynamic  Traction Control    Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC  provides maximum traction on loose ground   Driving stability is limited during acceleration  and when driving in bends     Activating DTC       we  Press the button     TRACTION is displayed in the instrument clus   ter and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights    up     Deactivating DTC     e Press the button again     a TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica   tor lamp go out     xDrive    xDrive is the all wheel drive system of your ve   hicle  Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC  further optimize traction and driving dynamics
91. Description of the speed limit detection  refer  to page 81  function     Trip computer  The vehicle features two types of computer      gt   Onboard info   the values can be reset as  often as necessary      gt   Trip computer   the values provide an  overview of the current trip     Resetting the trip computer  1   Vehicle Info    2   Trip computer    3   Reset   all values are reset      Automatically reset   all values are reset  approx  4 hours after the vehicle comes to  a standstill     Display on the Control Display   Display the onboard computer or trip computer  on the Control Display    1   Vehicle Info     2     Onboard info  or  Trip computer     Resetting the fuel consumption or  speed    1   Vehicle Info    2     Onboard info    3   Consumpt   or  Speed   4   Yes     Sport displays    The concept    In the Control Display  the current values for  power and torque can be displayed     Displaying sport displays in the  Control Display  1   Vehicle Info     2   Sport displays     Speed warning    The concept    Display of a speed limit which  when reached   should cause a warning to be issued     The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed  drops below the set speed limit once by at  least 3 mph 5 km h     Displaying  setting or changing the   limit   1   Settings    2   Speed    3   Warning at     4  Turn the controller until the desired limit is  displayed    5  Press the controller    The speed limit is stored     Activating deactivating the limit    1   Setti
92. IG  iDrive    Split screen    General information   Additional information can be displayed on the  right side of the split screen  e g   information  from the onboard computer    In the divided screen view  the so called split  screen  this information remains visible even  when you change to another menu     Switching the split screen on and off       Press the button   2   Split screen     Selecting the display       ii Press the button   2   Split screen     3  Move the controller until the split screen is  selected     4  Press the controller or select  Split screen  content      5  Select the desired menu item     Split screen content  LY Split screen  Map facing north  Map direction of travel    Map perspective view  Fosition   v Onboard info  Trip computer    Programmable memory  buttons    General information    The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro   grammable memory buttons and called up di   rectly  e g   radio stations  navigation destina     22       tions  phone numbers and entry points into the  menu     The settings are stored for the remote control  currently in use     Without navigation system and  telephone    Only radio stations can be stored on the but   tons  refer to user s manual for Navigation  En   tertainment  Communication     Saving a function  1  Highlight the function via the iDrive     2  g g Press the desired button for more  than 2 seconds     Running a function    Press the button     sv The function will run immediately  This  mea
93. accidents     Opening       Pull the handle     The light in the glove compartment switches  on     The net in the glove compartment is provided  for stowing the storage tray for the cupholder   refer to page 158     Closing  Fold cover closed     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Storage compartments   Controls    Locking    The glove compartment can be locked with an  integrated key to separately secure the trunk  lid  refer to page 38  for example     This prevents access to the glove compart   ment and to the cargo area     After the glove compartment is locked  the re   mote control can be handed over  such as ata  hotel  without the integrated key     Driver s side    Note    Close the glove compartment again im   mediately    Close the glove compartment immediately af   ter use while driving  otherwise  injury may oc   cur during accidents     Opening       Pull the handle     Closing  Fold cover closed           Front storage compartment    Sa    Raise the lid to open it     Compartments in the doors    Do not stow any breakable objects    Do not store any breakable objects  e  g   glass bottles  in the compartments  or there is  an increased risk of injury in the event of an ac   cident  lt     Center armrest    Front    A storage compartment is located in the center  armrest between the front seats     Opening    Fold the center armrest up     Repositioning  Center armrest can be pushed forwards or  backwards  It engages in the end positions    
94. age is distorted  check the basic set     The setting is stored for the remote control tings     currently in use    Depending on the light conditions  the bright  Switching on off  ness control may not be clearly visible  1   Settings   2   Head Up Display     3   Head Up Display     Assist system information    Display on the Control Display    Information on the Assist system can be dis  Display  layed by activating Assist on the Control Dis     a i   Overview   gt  Speed   1   Settings     l Navigation system   2   Control display      gt   2   Driver assistance info   gt  Check Control messages    gt     Selection list from the instrument cluster     87  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Controls     Displays     gt  Driver assistance systems     Some of this information is only displayed  briefly as needed     Selecting displays in the Head up   Display   1   Settings    2   Head Up Display    3   Displayed information    4  Select the desired displays in the Head up  Display     The settings are stored for the remote control  currently in use     Setting the brightness    The brightness is automatically adjusted to the  ambient light     The basic setting can be adjusted manually    Settings     Head Up Display     Brightness     a ie ie    Turn the controller     When the low beams are switched on  the  brightness of the Head up Display can be ad   ditionally influenced using the instrument light     ing   The setting is stored for the remote cont
95. al when the vehicle is parked  using valet service  The infrared remote con   Closing trol can be handed out without the key     Emergency unlocking       Recessed grips in the interior trim of the trunk  lid make it easier to pull down the lid     Pull the handle inside the cargo area     38  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Opening and closing   Controls    Unlocking    The trunk lid unlocks     Comfort Access    The concept    The vehicle can be accessed without activat   ing the remote control     All you need to do is to have the remote con   trol with you  such as in your pants pocket     The vehicle automatically detects the remote  control when it is nearby or in the passenger  compartment     Comfort Access supports the following func   tions      gt  Unlocking locking of the vehicle   Convenient closing    Open the trunk lid individually    Open trunk lid with no touch activation    yy yy Y    Start the engine     Functional requirements   gt  There are no external sources of interfer   ence nearby      gt  To lock the vehicle  the remote control  must be located outside of the vehicle      gt  The next unlocking and locking cycle is not  possible until after approx  2 seconds      gt  The engine can only be started if the re   mote control is in the vehicle     Comparison with ordinary remote  control   The functions can be controlled by pressing  the buttons of the remote control or Comfort  Access        Grasp the door handle on the driver s
96. ally  e g   in tun   nels  in twilight or if there is precipitation  The  indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights  up    A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can  cause the lights to be switched on     The low beams always stay on when the fog  lamps are switched on     Personal responsibility    The automatic headlamp control cannot  serve as a Substitute for your personal judg   ment in determining when the lamps should be  switched on in response to ambient lighting  conditions     For example  the sensors are unable to detect  fog or hazy weather  To avoid safety risks  you  should always switch on the lamps manually  under these conditions     Daytime running lights    With the ignition switched on  the daytime run   ning lights light up in position 0   D Q  or 2     After the ignition is switched off  the parking  lamps light up in position 30 Q        Activating deactivating   In some countries  daytime running lights are  compulsory  so it may not be possible to deac   tivate the daytime running lights    1   Settings    2   Lighting    3   Daytime running lamps     The setting is stored for the remote control  currently in use     90    Roadside parking lamps                 The vehicle can be illuminated on one side     Switching on    With the ignition switched off  press the lever  either up or down past the resistance point for  approx  2 seconds     Switching off    Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in  the opposite direction     Adap
97. ator lamp goes out after unlock   ing   The vehicle has not been tampered with      gt  The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking  until the engine ignition is switched on  but  no longer than approx  5 minutes     An alarm has been triggered     Tilt alarm sensor  The tilt of the vehicle is monitored     The alarm system responds in situations such  as attempts to steal a wheel or when the car is  towed     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14       Interior motion sensor    The windows and glass sunroof must be  closed for the system to function properly     Avoiding unintentional alarms    The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen   sor can be switched off together  such as in  the following situations      gt  In automatic car washes    gt  In duplex garages      gt  During transport on car carrying trains  at  sea or on a trailer      gt  When animals are to remain in the vehicle     Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and  interior motion sensor    Press the remote control button again  within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle  is locked        The indicator lamp lights up for approx  2 sec   onds and then continues to flash     The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen   sor are switched off until the vehicle is locked  again     Power windows    General information    Take the remote control with you    Take the remote control with you when  leaving the vehicle so that children  for exam   ple  cannot operate the power windows and in   jure the
98. ave the vehicle towed or transported there   Otherwise  tire damage can become life threat   ening for vehicle occupants and also other  road users  lt     Repair of tire damage    For safety reasons  the manufacturer of  your vehicle recommends that you do not have  damaged tires repaired  they should be re   placed  Otherwise  damage can occur as a re   sult  lt     Changing wheels and tires    Mounting    Information on mounting tires    Have mounting and balancing performed  only by a service center     If this work is not carried out properly  there is  the danger of subsequent damage and related  safety hazards  lt     193    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Mobility   Wheels and tires    Wheel and tire combination    You can ask the service center about the right  wheel tire combination and wheel rim versions  for the vehicle     Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair  the function of a variety of systems such as  ABS or DSC     To maintain good handling and vehicle re   sponse  use only tires with a single tread con   figuration from a single manufacturer     Following tire damage  have the original wheel  and tire combination remounted on the vehicle  as soon as possible     Approved wheels and tires    You should only use wheels and tires  that have been approved by the vehicle manu   facturer for your vehicle type  otherwise  for  example  despite having the same official size  ratings  variations can lead to body contact and  with it  t
99. back  slightly     Driving off without delay    After releasing the foot brake  start driv   ing without delay  since the drive off assistant  will not hold the vehicle in place for more than  approx  2 seconds and the vehicle will begin  rolling back  lt     118  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Driving comfort   Controls    Driving comfort    Vehicle equipment    All standard  country specific and optional  equipment that is offered in the model series is  described in this chapter  Therefore  equip   ment is also described that is not available in a  vehicle  e  g   because of the selected optional  equipment or country variant  This also applies  for safety related functions and systems     Active Cruise Control with  Stop  amp  Go function  ACC    The concept    This system can be used to select a desired  speed that the vehicle will maintain automati   cally on clear roads     To the extent possible  the system automati   cally adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle  ahead of you     The distance that the vehicle maintains to the  vehicle ahead of you can be varied     For safety reasons  it depends on the speed     To maintain a certain distance  the system au   tomatically reduces the speed  applies the  brakes lightly  or accelerates again if the vehi   cle ahead begins moving faster     If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt  the  system is able to detect this within the given  system limits  If the vehicle ahead of your  drives away again
100. bol on the automatic climate con   trol lights up when the switch on time is acti   vated      amp  The symbol on the automatic climate con   trol flashes when the system has been  switched on     The system will only be switched on within the  next 24 hours  After that  it needs to be reacti   vated     147    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Controls     Interior equipment    Interior equipment    Vehicle equipment    All standard  country specific and optional  equipment that is offered in the model series is  described in this chapter  Therefore  equip   ment is also described that is not available in a  vehicle  e  g   because of the selected optional  equipment or country variant  This also applies  for safety related functions and systems     Universal garage door  opener    The concept    The universal garage door opener can operate  up to 3 functions of remote controlled sys   tems such as garage door drives or lighting  systems  The universal garage door opener re     places up to 3 different hand held transmitters     To operate the remote control  the buttons on  the interior rearview mirror must be program   med with the desired functions  The hand held  transmitter for the particular system is required  in order to program the remote control     During programming       During programming and before activat   ing a device using the integrated universal re   mote control  ensure that there are no people   animals  or objects in the range of 
101. button  of the desired function on the hand held  transmitter and the button to be program   med on the interior rearview mirror  The  LED on the interior rearview mirror will be   gin flashing slowly     5  Release both buttons as soon as the LED  flashes more rapidly  When the LED is  flashing faster  this indicates that the but   ton on the interior rearview mirror has been  programmed     If the LED does not flash faster after at  least 60 seconds  change the distance be   tween the interior rearview mirror and the  hand held transmitter and repeat the step   Several more attempts at different distan   ces may be necessary  Wait at least   15 seconds between attempts     Canada  if programming with the hand   held transmitter was interrupted  hold  down the interior rearview mirror button  and repeatedly press and release the  hand held transmitter button for 2 sec   onds     6  To program other functions on other but   tons  repeat steps 3 to 5     The systems can be controlled using the inte   rior rearview mirror buttons     Special feature of the alternating   code wireless system    If you are unable to operate the system after  repeated programming  please check if the  system to be controlled features an alternat   ing code system     Read the system s operating manual  or press  the programmed button on the interior rear   view mirror longer  If the LED on the interior  rearview mirror starts flashing rapidly and then  stays lit constantly for 2 seconds  the syste
102. catch at the top on the con   nector of the connecting line and remove  the connector from the bulb holder     Replacing the bulbs    1  Loosen the four fasteners  arrow 1  on the  bulb holder and remove the bulb holder  from the tail lamp  arrow 2        Screw the tail lamp on with the two nuts          Insert and secure the cover  Make sure that  the tubular seal is not pinched     Lamps in the trunk lid    General information       Follow general instructions  refer to page 204   2  Press the defective bulb gently into the Reversing lamps  16 watt bulb  PW16W   socket  turn counterclockwise and remove  nner brake lamps  2i watt bulb H2IW  3  Proceed in the reverse order to insert the  new bulb and attach the bulb holder  Make  sure that the bulb holder engages in all fas   teners     Accessing the lamps    1  Use the screwdriver from the onboard ve   hicle tool kit to loosen and completely re   move the six screws on the trim     Installing the tail lamp    1  Connect the connecting line to the tail  lamp and secure the bulb holder in the clip     2  Make sure that the foam rubber sealing  ring Is on the centering pin  arrow 2  and is  not damaged     3  Position and firmly press the outer part of  the tail lamp onto the rubber mount  ar   row 1 and the inner part onto the centering       2  Carefully loosen the trim from the trunk lid   starting at the edge and working toward  the area around the recessed grips  Make  sure that the trim does not become stuck     3  Carefu
103. ch time the rocker switch is pressed  past the point of resistance  the desired  speed increases or decreases by a maxi   mum of 5 mph 10 km h     Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the  action     Distance    Selecting a distance    Adjust the distance according to the traf   fic and weather conditions  otherwise  there is  the danger of an accident occurring  Maintain  the prescribed safety distance  lt     Reduce distance    Fi Press the button repeatedly until the  sk desired distance is set     The selected distance  refer to page 123  is  displayed in the instrument cluster   Increase distance    Pai Press the button repeatedly until the  hall desired distance is set     The selected distance  refer to page 123  is  displayed in the instrument cluster     Calling up the desired speed and  distance  While driving     Res Press the button with the system  switched on        In the following cases  the stored speed value  is deleted and cannot be called up again     122     gt  When the system is switched off    gt  When the ignition is switched off     While standing    Before leaving the vehicle  secure it  against rolling    Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run   ning  engage position P of the automatic trans   mission and apply the parking brake  Other   wise  the vehicle may begin to roll     The system brought the vehicle to a complete  standstill      gt  Green marking in the speedometer     Your vehicle accelerates automatically as  soon as the 
104. cking via door  lock 37   Locking unlocking with re   mote control 35   Locking  automatic 41   Locking  settings 41   Lock  power window 44   Locks  doors  and win   dows 60   Low beams 89   Low beams  automatic  refer  to High beam Assistant 91   Lower back support 49   Low Sulfur Diesel 181   Luggage rack  refer to Roof   mounted luggage rack 167   Lumbar support 49    M    Maintenance 202  Maintenance require   ments 202  Maintenance  service require   ments 80    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Everything from A to Z   Reference        Maintenance system   BMW 202   Malfunction displays  refer to  Check Control 76   Manual air distribu   tion 142  146   Manual air flow 142  146   Manual mode  transmis   sion 71   Manual operation  door  lock 37   Manual operation  exterior  mirrors 55   Manual operation  fuel filler  flap 178   Manual operation  Park Dis   tance Control PDC 129   Manual operation  rearview  camera 131   Manual operation  Side  View 133   Manual operation  Top  View 135   Manual transmission 69   Marking on approved  tires 194   Marking  run flat tires 195   Master key  refer to Remote  control 32   Maximum cooling 145   Maximum speed  display 81   Maximum speed  winter  tires 194   Measure  units of 87   Medical kit 216   Memory  seat  mirror 53   Menu  EfficientDynamics 171   Menu in instrument clus   ter 83   Menus  operating  iDrive 16   Menus  refer to iDrive operat   ing concept 18   Messages  refer to Check  Control 76   Micr
105. ct the tire infla   tion pressure at least twice a month and before  starting on a long trip     Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re   sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and  tire wear     Drive away immediately    Do not wait for the engine to warm up while  the vehicle remains stationary  Start driving  right away  but at moderate engine speeds     This is the fastest way for the cold engine to  reach its operating temperature     Look well ahead when  driving  Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking     By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi   cle driving ahead of you     Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces  fuel consumption     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Saving fuel   Drivingtips tips    Avoid high engine speeds    Use 1st gear to get the vehicle in motion  Be   ginning with 2nd gear  accelerate rapidly   When accelerating  shift up before reaching  high engine speeds     When you reach the desired speed  shift into  the highest applicable gear and drive with the  engine speed as low as possible and at a con   stant speed     As arule  driving at low engine speeds lowers  fuel consumption and reduces wear     The gear shift indicator of your vehicle indi   cates the most fuel efficient gear     Use coasting    When approaching a red light  take your foot  off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to  a halt     On a downhill gradient  take your foot off the  accelerator and let the vehicle roll     The 
106. d  up  Ensure that adequate clearance is available  before opening     If the doors were not unlocked  the trunk lid is   locked again as soon as it is pushed closed   Do not place the remote control in the  cargo area    Take the remote control with you and do not  leave it in the cargo area  otherwise  the re     36    mote control is locked inside the vehicle when  the trunk lid is closed        Malfunction    If the vehicle can no longer be locked or un   locked with the remote control  the battery  may be discharged or there may be interfer   ence from external sources such as mobile  phones  metal objects  overhead power lines   transmission towers  etc     In this case  lock unlock the vehicle without the  remote control  refer to page 37     For US owners only    The transmitter and receiver units comply with  part 15 of the FCC Federal Communication  Commission regulations  Operation is gov   erned by the following     FCC ID    LX8766S   LX8766E   LX8CAS   LX8CAS2   MYTCAS4   Compliance statement     yy yy oY   amp     This device complies with part 15 of the FCC  Rules  Operation is subject to the following  two conditions      gt  This device may not cause harmful inter   ference  and     gt  this device must accept any interference  received  including interference that may  cause undesired operation     Any unauthorized modifications or changes to  these devices could void the user s authority to  operate this equipment     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 92
107. d or interrupted system    If the system is deactivated or inter   rupted  actively intervene by braking  steering  and  if necessary  with evasive maneuvers  oth   erwise  there is the danger of an accident oc   curring   lt     If switching off the system while stationary   press on the brake pedal at the same time     m I Press the button   or        gt  If active  press twice    gt  If interrupted  press once     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Driving comfort   Controls    The displays go out  The stored desired speed  and distance are deleted     Interrupting    E When active  press the button   R    If interrupting the system while stationary   press on the brake pedal at the same time     The system is automatically interrupted in the  following situations      gt  When the brakes are applied    gt  When drive mode D is removed      gt  When DTC Dynamic Traction Control is  activated or DSC is deactivated      gt  When DSC is actively controlling stability     When SPORT    is activated with Driving  Dynamics Control      gt  Ifthe safety belt and the driver s door are  opened when the vehicle is standing still      gt  Ifthe system has not detected objects for  an extended period  e g   on a road with  very little traffic without road edge line  markings      gt  If the detection range of the radar is dis   rupted  for example  by dirt or heavy fog     Maintaining storing the speed    Press the button   Or                 Press the rocker switc
108. dal and sounds from  the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its  active mode     163    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Driving tips       Objects within the range of movement  of the pedals    No objects in the area around the pedals       Keep floor mats  carpets  and any other  objects out of the area of motion of the pedals   otherwise  the function of the pedals could be  impeded while driving and create the risk of an  accident     Do not place additional floor mats over existing  mats or other objects     Only use floor mats that have been approved  for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in  place     Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas   tened again after they were removed for clean   ing  for example  lt     Driving in wet conditions    When roads are wet coated with road salt or  there is heavy rain  briefly exert gentle pres   sure on the brake pedal every few miles     Ensure that this action does not endanger  other road users     The heat generated in this process helps dry  the brake discs and pads     In this way braking efficiency will be available  when you need tt     Hills    Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the  gear in which the least braking is required   Otherwise  the brake system may overheat  re   sulting in a reduction in the brake system effi   ciency    You can increase the engine s braking effect  by shifting down  going all the way to first gear   if necessary     Avoid load on the brakes    Av
109. dition is referred to as coast   Ing   As soon as the brake or accelerator pedal is    depressed  the engine is automatically coupled  to the transmission again     172    Hints  Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO  re   fer to page 169  driving mode     Coasting is automatically activated when ECO  PRO mode is called via the Driving Dynamics  Control    The function is available in a certain speed  range    A forward looking driving style helps the driver  to use the function as often as possible and  supports the fuel conserving effect of coast   ing     Safety mode   The function is not available if one of the fol    lowing conditions is satisfied     gt  DSC OFF or TRACTION activated     gt  Driving in the dynamic limit range and on  steep uphill or downhill grades      gt  Battery charge status temporarily too low  or vehicle electrical system drawing exces   Sive current      gt  Cruise control activated     Functional requirements    In ECO PRO mode  this function is available in   a speed range from approximately 30 mph  ap   prox  50 km h to 100 mph  approx  160 km h  if  the following conditions are satisfied      gt  Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not  operated      gt  The selector lever is in selector lever posi   tion D      gt  Engine and transmission are at operating  temperature     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Saving fuel   Drivingtips tips    Display    Display in the instrument cluster    The mark in the bar display be  
110. dlamp courtesy delay fea   ture 89   Headlamp flasher 66   Headlamp glass 205   Headlamps 205   Headlamps  care 222   Headlamp washer system 66   Headliner 15   Head restraints 47   Head restraints  front 51   Head restraints  rear 52   Head up Display 87   Head up Display  care 224   Heavy cargo  stowing 166   Height  vehicle 228   High beam Assistant 91   High beams 66   High beams low beams  refer  to High beam Assistant 91   Hills 164   Hill start assistant  refer to  Drive off assistant 118   Hints 6   Holder for beverages 158   Homepage 6   Hood 197   Horn 12   Hotel function  trunk lid 38   Hot exhaust system 163   HUD Head up Display 87    235    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Reference   Everything from A to Z    Hydroplaning 163    Ice warning  see External  temperature warning 79   Icy roads  see External tem   perature warning 79   Identification marks  tires 191   Identification number  refer to  Important features in the en   gine compartment 196   iDrive 16   Ignition key  refer to Remote  control 32   Ignition off 61   Ignition on 61   Indication of a flat tire 98  101   Indicator and warning  lamps 76   Individual air distribu   tion 142  146   Individual settings  refer to  Personal Profile 33   Inflation pressure  tires 185   Inflation pressure warning  FTM  tires 100   Info display  refer to Com   puter 83   Initialize  Tire Pressure Moni   tor TPM 98   Initializing  Flat Tire Monitor  FTM 101   Instrument cluster 73   Instrument cl
111. e      gt  Donot place any electronic devices on the  passenger Seat if a child restraint system is  to be installed on it      gt  Do not place objects under the seat that  could press against the seat from below      gt  No moisture in or on the seat     Indicator lamp for the front passenger  airbags    pass     AIRBAG    OFF      Rs  ANa    The indicator lamp for the front passenger air   bags indicates the operating state of the front  passenger airbags     The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ac   tivated or deactivated      gt  The indicator lamp lights up  when a child who is properly  seated in a child restraint fix   ing system intended for that  purpose is detected on the  seat or the seat is empty   The airbags on the front  passenger side are not acti   vated         gt  The indicator lamp does not light up when   for example  a correctly seated person of  sufficient size is detected on the seat  The  airbags on the front passenger side are ac   tivated     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Safety   Controls    Detected child seats    The system generally detects children seated  in a child seat  especially in the child seats that  were required by NHTSA when the vehicle was  manufactured  After installing a child seat   make sure that the indicator lamp for the front  passenger airbags lights up  This indicates  that the child seat has been detected and the  front passenger airbags are not activated     Strength of the driver s and fro
112. e  lt     At a glance    Button in the vehicle       EPH Lane departure warning         a       Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Safety   Controls    Camera       The camera is located near the base of the  mirror     Keep the windshield in the area behind the in   terior rear view mirror clean and clear     Switching on off    RH Press the button         gt  On  the LED lights up    gt  Off  the LED goes out     The setting is stored for the remote control  currently in use     Display in the instrument cluster       gt  Lines  system is activated             gt  Arrows  at least one lane marking    was detected and warnings can be  issued     Issued warning    If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has  been detected  the steering wheel begins vi   brating     If the turn signal is set before changing the  lane  a warning is not issued     End of warning   The warning ends     gt  Automatically after approx  3 seconds    gt  When returning to your own lane     gt  When braking hard      gt  When using the turn signal     System limits    The system may not be fully functional in the  following situations      gt  In heavy fog  rain or snowfall      gt  Inthe event of missing  worn  poorly visi   ble  merging  diverging  or multiple lane  markings such as in construction areas      gt  When lane markings are covered in snow   ice  dirt or water      gt  In tight curves or on narrow lanes     When the lane markings are covered by  objects      gt  W
113. e  service life of the battery     Your service center will be glad to advise you  on questions regarding the battery     Battery replacement    Use approved vehicle batteries only    Only use vehicle batteries that have been  approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer   otherwise  the vehicle could be damaged and  systems or functions may not be fully availa   ble     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Replacing components   Mobility      After a battery replacement  have the battery  registered on the vehicle by your service cen   ter to ensure that all comfort functions are fully  available and that any Check Control mes   sages of these comfort functions are no longer  displayed     Charging the battery    Note  Do not connect charging devices to the  12 volt socket in the vehicle    Do not connect battery chargers to the fac   tory installed 12 volt sockets in the vehicle as  this may damage the vehicle battery due to an  increased power consumption   lt     General information    Make sure that the battery is always suffi   ciently charged to guarantee that the battery  remains usable for its full service life     The battery may need to be charged in the fol   lowing cases      gt  When making frequent short distance  drives      gt  Ifthe vehicle is not used for prolonged pe   riods  longer than a month     Starting aid terminals    In the vehicle  only charge the battery via the  starting aid terminals  refer to page 217  in the  engine compart
114. e driving    If on a rare occasion it is necessary to  use the parking brake while driving  do not use  excessive force when applying it  When using  it  Keep the button on the lever depressed     Otherwise  using excessive force when apply   ing the parking brake may cause the rear  wheels to lock  resulting in fishtailing  lt     To prevent corrosion and braking control on  one side only  lightly apply the parking brake  periodically while coasting  if traffic conditions  permit     The brake lamps will not light up if the parking  brake is engaged     Turn signal  high beams   headlamp flasher    Turn signal    Do not fold in the exterior mirrors    Do not fold in the exterior mirror while  driving and when the turn signals warning  flashers are working  or else the additional  flasher lights in the exterior mirror will no lon   ger be in the prescribed position and will be  difficult to see  lt     65    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Controls     Driving    Using turn signals       Press the lever beyond the resistance point     To switch off manually  press the lever to the  resistance point     Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp  indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed     Triple turn signal activation   Press the lever to the resistance point    The turn signal flashes three times    The function can be activated or deactivated     1   Settings   2   Lighting   3   Triple turn signal     The setting is stored for the remote con
115. e environment by tempo   rarily suspending the supply of outside air  The  system then recirculates the air currently  within the vehicle     E Press the button repeatedly to select  oo an operating mode     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Climate control   Controls     gt  LED off  outside air flows in continuously     LED on  recirculated air mode  the supply  of outside air into the vehicle is perma   nently blocked     Recirculated air mode switches off automati   cally at low external temperatures after a cer   tain amount of time in order to window fog   ging    If the windows fog over  switch off recircu   lated air mode and increase the air flow  if nec   esSary     Continuous recirculated air mode       The recirculated air mode should not be  used for an extended period of time  as the air  quality inside the vehicle deteriorates stead   ily  lt     Switching the system on off    Switching off     amp  Press the left button for the minimum  i speed        Switching on   Press any button except    gt  Rear window defroster    gt  Seat heating     Microfilter    In external and recirculated air mode the mi   crofilter filters dust and pollen out of the air     This filter should be replaced during scheduled  maintenance  refer to page 202  of your vehi   cle     143    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Controls     Climate control    Automatic climate control with enhanced features       15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8   1 Seat heatin
116. e event of an accident despite  corresponding severity of the accident  lt     Automatic deactivation of the front  passenger airbags    The system determines whether the front pas   senger seat is occupied by measuring the re   sistance of the human body     The front  knee  and side airbag on the front  passenger side are activated or deactivated  accordingly     Leave feet in the footwell    Make sure that the front passenger  keeps his or her feet in the footwell  otherwise   the front passenger airbags may not function  properly  lt     Child restraint fixing system in the front  passenger seat       Before transporting a child on the front pas   senger seat  refer to the safety notes and in   structions under Children on the front passen   ger seat  lt     Malfunction of the automatic  deactivation system    When transporting older children and adults   the front passenger airbags may be deacti   vated in certain sitting positions  In this case   the indicator lamp for the front passenger air   bags lights up    In this case  change the sitting position so that  the front passenger airbags are activated and  the indicator lamp goes out     If it is not possible to activate the airbags  have  the person sit in the rear     To make sure that the occupied seat cushion  can be evaluated correctly    96        gt  Do not attach covers  cushions  ball mats  or other items to the front passenger seat  unless they are specifically recommended  by the manufacturer of your vehicl
117. e of the sensors is represented in the  colors red  green and yellow     When the image of the rearview camera is dis   played  the switch can be made to PDC     Ry  Rear view camera   System limits    Limits of ultrasonic measurement    The detection of objects can reach the physi   cal limits of ultrasonic measurement  e g   in  the following circumstances      gt  For small children and animals      gt  For persons with certain clothing  e g   coats      gt  If there is an external disturbance of the ul   trasound  e g  from passing vehicles or  loud machines      gt  When sensors are dirty  iced over  dam   aged or out of position      gt  Under certain weather conditions  such as  high relative humidity  rain  snowfall ex   treme heat or strong wind      gt  With tow bars and trailer hitches of other  vehicles     With thin or wedge shaped objects   With moving objects     With elevated  protruding objects such as  ledges or cargo     With objects with corners and sharp edges      gt  With objects with a fine surface structure   such as fences      gt  For objects with porous surfaces     129    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Controls     Driving comfort    Low objects already displayed  e g   curbs  can  move into the blind area of the sensors before  or after a continuous tone sounds     False warnings    PDC may issue a warning under the following  conditions even though there is no obstacle  within the detection range      gt  In heavy rain   
118. e the belt guide of the child seat   move the passenger seat carefully forward un   til the best possible belt guide position is  reached     Backrest width    Adjustable backrest width  before installing a  child restraint fixing system in the front pas   senger seat  open the backrest width com   pletely  Do not change the backrest width  again and do not call up a memory position     Backrest width for the child seat    Before installing a child restraint fixing  system in the front passenger seat  the back   rest width must be opened completely  Do not  change the adjustment after this  otherwise   the stability of the child seat will be reduced     Child seat security    F  4          r  L    ll          a  1    a    FP    nG      es       7  Ly  ms S     a Jf  p d  med    The rear safety belts and the front passenger  safety belt can be locked against pulling out for  mounting the child restraint fixing systems     Locking the safety belt  1  Pull out the belt webbing completely     2  Secure the child restraint fixing system  with the belt     Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and  pull it taut against the child restraint fixing  system  The safety belt is locked     oo    Unlocking the safety belt  1  Unbuckle the belt buckle   2  Remove the child restraint fixing system     3  Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com   pletely     LATCH child restraint fixing system    LATCH  Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil   dren     58    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 
119. e the vehicle checked immediately   otherwise  surplus oil can lead to engine dam   age  lt     Detailed measurement    The concept    In the detailed measurement the oil level is  checked and displayed via a scale     During the measurement  the idle speed is in   creased somewhat     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Engine oil   Mobility      General information    A detailed measurement is only possible with  certain engines     Requirements   gt  Vehicle is on level road      gt  Manual transmission  shift lever in neutral  position  clutch and accelerator pedals not  depressed      gt  Automatic transmission  selector lever in  selector lever position N or P and accelera   tor pedal not depressed      gt  Engine is running and is at operating tem   perature     Performing a detailed measurement  In order to perform a detailed measurement of  the engine oil level    1   Vehicle Info    2   Vehicle status    3  SE  Measure engine oil level    4   Start measurement     The oil level is checked and displayed via a  scale     Duration  approx  1 minute     Adding engine oil    General information    Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehi   cle before engine oil is added     Filler neck       Only add 1 US quart liter of oil when the mes   sage is displayed in the instrument cluster     Adding oil    Add oil within the next 125 miles 200 km   Otherwise  the engine may be damaged  lt     Do not add too much engine oil    When too much engine oil 
120. ea only if they are moving in  the direction of the central area     Ata glance    Button in the vehicle          Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Safety   Controls    Be Intelligent Safety button  JEN    Camera       The camera is located near the base of the  mirror     Keep the windshield in the area behind the in   terior rear view mirror clean and clear     Switching on off    Switching on automatically    The system is automatically active every time  the engine is started using the Start Stop but   ton     Switching off    EW Press the button  the systems are  mA switched off  The LED goes out     Press the button  the systems are switched off   The LED lights up     Warning with braking function    Note  Adapting your speed and driving style       The warning does not relieve the driver  of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving  speed and style to the traffic conditions   lt     Display  If a collision with a person detected in this way    is Imminent  a warning symbol appears on the  instrument cluster and in the Head up Display     it     The red symbol is displayed and a sig   nal sounds       Intervene immediately by braking or  making an evasive maneuver     Braking intervention    The warning prompts the driver himself to in   tervene  During a warning  the maximum brak   ing force is used  A prerequisite for the brake  booster is a sufficiently fast and sufficiently  strong actuation of the brake pedal  In addition   if there is a
121. ecome damaged   lt     Clothes hooks    The clothes hooks are located in the grab han   dles in the rear     Do not obstruct view    When suspending clothing from the  hooks  ensure that it will not obstruct the driv   er s vision     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Storage compartments   Controls    No heavy objects       Do not hang heavy objects from the  hooks  otherwise  they may present a danger  to passengers during braking and evasive ma   neuvers  lt     Storage compartments in the  cargo area    Storage compartment    A storage compartment is located on the left  side     Located on the right side is a storage compart   ment for the onboard vehicle tool kit  refer to  page 204  and first aid kit  refer to page 216     Net    Small objects can be stowed in the net on the  left side     Hooks multi function hook       A multi function hook is located on each side  of the cargo area     The multi function hooks can be loaded up to  a max  of 8 8 Ibs 4 kg     Light and suitable objects only       Only hang light bags or suitable objects  from the holders  Otherwise  there is a danger  of objects flying about during braking and eva   sive maneuvers     Only transport heavy luggage in the trunk if it  has been appropriately secured  lt     Retaining strap    A retaining strap is available on the right side  trim for fastening small objects     Lashing eyes in the cargo area    To secure the cargo  refer to page 166  there  are four lashing eyes in t
122. ed   the system requests that the driver intervene  by braking and carrying out evasive maneu   vers  if necessary  You must react yourself   otherwise  there is the danger of an accident  occurring     Unexpected lane change       If a vehicle ahead of you unexpectedly moves  into another lane from behind a stopped vehi   cle  you yourself must react  as the system  does not react to stopped vehicles     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Driving comfort   Controls    Cornering       If the desired speed is too high for a curve  the  speed is reduced slightly in the curve  although  curves cannot be anticipated in advance   Therefore  drive into a curve at an appropriate  speed     In tight curves  situations may result due to the  restricted detection range of the system in  which a vehicle driving ahead of you may not  be detected at all  or not until after a consider   able delay        When approaching a curve  the system may  react briefly to the vehicles in the next lane due  to the bend of the curve  Any deceleration of  the vehicle by the system can be compensated  for by briefly accelerating  After the accelerator  pedal is released  the system becomes active  again and independently controls the speed     Driving away   In some situations  the vehicle cannot drive  away automatically  e g   on steep inclines or  behind bumps in the road     Radar sensor    For US owners only    The transmitter and receiver units comply with  part 15 of the FCC F
123. ederal Communication  Commission regulations  Operation is gov   erned by the following     FCC ID    gt  OAYARSS3 A  Compliance statement     This device complies with part 15 of the FCC  Rules  Operation is subject to the following  two conditions      gt  This device may not cause harmful inter   ference  and     gt  this device must accept any interference  received  including interference that may  cause undesired operation    Any unauthorized modifications or changes to   these devices could void the user s authority to   operate this equipment     Malfunction    The system cannot be activated if the radar  sensor is not aligned correctly  This may be  caused by damage incurred during parking  for  example     A Check Control message is displayed if the  system fails     Cruise control    The concept    The system is functional at speeds beginning  at approx  20 mph 30 km h     It maintains the speed that was set using the  control elements on the steering wheel     The system brakes on downhill gradients if en   gine braking action is insufficient     125    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Controls     Driving comfort    Unfavorable conditions    Do not use the system if unfavorable  conditions make it impossible to drive at a con   stant speed  for instance      gt  On curvy roads    gt  In heavy traffic      gt  On slippery roads  in fog  snow or rain  or  on a loose road surface     Otherwise  you could lose control of the vehi   cle and cause
124. efficiency of the driving  style     Mark in the CHARGE area  arrow 1  display for  energy recovered by coasting or when braking     Mark in the POWER area  arrow 2  display  when accelerating     The efficiency of the driving style is shown by  the color of the bar      gt  Blue display  efficient driving style as long  as the mark moves within the blue range     gt  Gray display  adjust driving style  e  g  by  backing off the accelerator pedal    The display switches to blue as soon as all   conditions for fuel economy optimized driving   are met     ECO PRO Tip   driving instruction    The arrow indicates that the  driving style can be adjusted to  Sy be more fuel efficient by backing   off the accelerator for instance     D ECO PRO    I POWER                    Note    The driving style display and ECO PRO tips in  the instrument cluster appear when the ECO  PRO display is activated     Activating driving style and ECO PRO tips   1   Settings     2   Instr  cluster display   3   ECO PRO Info     ECO PRO tip   Symbols    An additional symbol and a text instruction are  displayed     Symbol Measure    For efficient driving style  back off  the accelerator or delay accelerating  to allow time to assess road condi   tions     Reduce speed to the selected ECO  km h PRO speed        Automatic transmission  switch  from M S to D and avoid manual  shift interventions                 Manual shift transmission  follow  u shifting instructions      n Manual shift transmission  enga
125. eft on  the touchpad     gt  To enter a blank space  slide to the right in  the center of the touchpad     gt  To enter a hyphen  slide to the right in the  upper area of the touchpad      gt  Toenter an underscore  slide to the right in  the lower area of the touchpad     Using interactive map and Internet  The interactive map in the navigation system  and Internet sites can be moved via the touch   pad        Slide in the corre   sponding direction     Move interactive map  or Internet sites     Drag inwards or  outwards on the    Enlarge shrink interac   tive map or Internet    sites  touchpad with the  fingers   Display the menu or Tap once     open a link in the Inter   net        20    Changing settings   Settings on the control display  such as the  volume  can be made via the touchpad  To do  this slide to the left or right accordingly     Example  setting the clock    Setting the clock    1  K Press the button  The main menu is    displayed    2  Turn the controller until  Settings  is high   lighted  and then press the controller   1    Main menu    Multimedia    Telephone    Navigation  Office  ConnectedDrive  Vehicle Info  Settings       3  If necessary  move the controller to the left  to display  Time Date      4  Turn the controller until  Time Date  is  highlighted  and then press the controller   IN SF Settings    Time Date    Language Units  Tone    Speed  Climate  Lighting  Doors key       Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    iDrive   Atag
126. ehicle  eye wit     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Notes Po    ness accounts     possibly with the assistance  of an expert     Additional functions that are contractually  agreed with the customer  such as vehicle lo   cating in an emergency  enable certain vehicle  data to be transmitted from the vehicle     Event Data Recorder EDR    This vehicle is equipped with an event data re   corder EDR  The main purpose of an EDR is to  record  in certain crash or near crash like situa   tions  such as an air bag deployment or hitting  a road obstacle  data that will assist in under   standing how a vehicle   s systems performed   The EDR is designed to record data related to  vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a  short period of time  typically 30 seconds or  less     The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record  such data as      gt  How various systems in your vehicle were  operating     gt  Whether or not the driver and passenger  safety belts were fastened      gt  How far  if at all  the driver was depressing  the accelerator and or brake pedal      gt  How fast the vehicle was traveling     These data can help provide a better under   standing of the circumstances in which  crashes and injuries occur     EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a  nontrivial crash situation occurs  no data are  recorded by the EDR under normal driving  conditions and no personal data  e g   name   gender  age  and crash location  are recorded     However  ot
127. ent 210   Rearview camera 130    238    Rearview mirror 54  Rear window de   froster 142  146  Recirculated air filter 146  Recirculated air  mode 142  145  Recommended fuel  grade 180  Recommended tire  brands 194  Refueling 178  Remaining range 79  Remote control key 32  Remote control  malfunc   tion 36  Remote control  univer   sal 148  Replacement fuse 213  Replacing parts 204  Replacing wheels tires 193  Reporting safety defects 9  RES button 122  Reserve warning  refer to  Range 79  Reset  Tire Pressure Monitor  TPM 98  Retaining straps  securing  cargo 166  Retreaded tires 194  Roadside parking lamps 90  Roller sunblinds 44  RON recommended fuel  grade 180  Roof load capacity 228  Roof mounted luggage  rack 167  Rope for tow starting   towing 219  RSC Run Flat System Com   ponent  refer to Run flat  tires 195  Rubber components   care 223  Run flat tires 195    S    Safe braking 163   Safety 7   Safety belt reminder for driv   er s seat and front passen   ger seat 51   Safety belts 50   Safety belts  care 223   Safety switch  windows 44   Safety systems  airbags 94   Saving fuel 168   Screen  refer to Control Dis   play 16   Screwdriver  see Onboard ve   hicle tool kit 204   Screw thread for tow fit   ting 220   Seat and mirror memory 53   Seat belts  refer to Safety  belts 50   Seat heating  front 50   Seat heating  rear 50   Seating position for chil   dren 57   Seats 47   Selection list in instrument  cluster 83   Selector lever  automatic  transmission 70   Sensor
128. es if work is carried out improperly  lt     For checking and adjusting headlamp aim   please contact your BMW center     208  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Replacing components   Mobility      21 watt bulb  PY21W    1  Inthe wheel house  loosen the two brack   ets and remove the cover        2  If necessary  pull the inside trim of the  wheel house slightly inward  Turn the bulb  holder counterclockwise and remove           pi    3  Press the bulb gently into the socket  turn  counterclockwise and remove     4  Install the new bulb and bulb holder in re   verse order of removal     5  Attach the cover to the wheel house     Front fog lamps   Follow general instructions  refer to page 204   35 watt bulb  H8    1  Use the handle of the screwdriver from the    onboard vehicle tool kit to remove the  three wheel house panel screws  arrow 1     Carefully pull back the wheel house panel   arrow 2        2  Pull off the bulb connector  arrow 1   Turn the bulb  arrow 2   Left side of vehicle  turn clockwise     Right side of vehicle  turn counterclock   wise     Remove the bulb        3  Insert the new bulb  connect the connector  and screw on the wheel house panel     Turn signal in exterior mirror  Follow general instructions  refer to page 204     The turn signals in the exterior mirrors feature  LED technology  Contact your service center  in the event of a malfunction     209    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Replacing components
129. ese situations     Parking assistant    The concept       This system assists the driver in parking paral   lel to the road     Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces  on both sides of the vehicle     The parking assistant calculates the best pos   sible parking line and takes control of steering  during the parking procedure     When parking  also take note of the visual and  acoustic information and instructions issued  by the PDC  the parking assistant and the rear   view camera and react accordingly     A component of the parking assistant is the  PDC Park Distance Control  refer to page 128     136    Hints    Personal responsibility    Even an active system does not relieve  the driver from personal responsibility for the  driving process     Because of technical system limits  the system  cannot independently react appropriately in all  traffic situations     Continuously and attentively monitor the driv   ing process  the area surrounding the vehicle  and the traffic situation  and actively intervene  when required  otherwise  there is a risk of an  accident   lt     Changes to the parking space    Changes to the parking space after it was  measured are not taken into account by the  system     Therefore  always be alert and ready to inter   vene  otherwise  there is the danger of an acci   dent occurring     Transporting loads    Loads that extend beyond the perimeter  of the vehicle are not taken into account by the  system during the parking procedure     Theref
130. eter Current fuel consumption    Indicator warning lamps Electronic displays    mh ON    CON OO O1    Tachometer Display reset miles    74  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    isplays Ee Kele             Electronic displays    Overview  instrument cluster    Z  5N    1 Messages  e g   Check Control 76    Time   Date 7   External temperature  Selection lists 83  Service requirements          Miles trip miles 79   Computer   Transmission display 7   Gear shift indicator   Status  Driving Dynamics Control    Jo    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14             1 Time  External temperature  Date  Selection list  such as for the radio  Speed limit detection  Computer  Miles trip miles    Navigation display  see user s manual for  Navigation  Entertainment and Communi   cation        The concept    bd d    The Check Control system monitors functions  in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions  in the monitored systems     A Check Control message is displayed as a  combination of indicator or warning lamps and  text messages in the instrument cluster and in  the Head up Display        76    sed features    Vics    WS    Status  Driving Dynamics Control  2 Energy recovery  Transmission display  Current fuel consumption  ECO PRO  3 Messages  e g   Check Control  Service requirements    In addition  an acoustic signal may be output  and a text message may appear on the Control  Display           Wx S    The indicator and warning e  in the instru
131. evel   52    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Adjusting   Controls    Adjusting the height     gt  To raise  pull      gt  To lower  press the button  arrow 1  and  push the head restraint down     The center head restraint cannot be adjusted  in elevation     Folding down head restraints    Extending retracting head restraint       Only fold down head restraint if no pas     sengers are in the rear  Fold out retracted  headrests again if passengers are being car   ried in the rear  otherwise  there is increased  risk of injury in the event of an accident  lt           x iy e     gt  To lower flaps  press the button  arrow 1     and press down the head restraint  arrow 2      gt  Fold back up  pull up head restraints     Removing    Only remove the head restraint if no one will be  sitting in the seat in question     Pull the head restraint upward as far as  possible        2  Press the button  arrow 1  and pull the  head restraint out completely     Before transporting passengers    Reinstall the head restraint before trans   porting anyone in the seat  otherwise  the pro   tective function of the head restraint is unavail   able  lt     Seat and mirror memory    Hints    Do not retrieve the memory while driving       Do not retrieve the memory setting while  driving  as an unexpected movement of the  seat could result in an accident  lt     Keep the movement area unobstructed       When changing the seat position  keep  the seat s area of movement unob
132. ever is in selector lever position D      gt  Shift up  pull right shift paddle    gt  Shift down  pull left shift paddle     71    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Controls     Driving    Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine  and road speeds  for example downshifting is  not possible if the engine speed is too high     The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in   strument cluster  followed by the current gear     Displays in the instrument cluster    The selector lever position is dis   played  e g   P     Sport automatic transmission  Launch  Control    The concept    Launch Control enables optimum acceleration  on surfaces with good traction     Hints    Component wear   Do not use Launch Control too often   otherwise  this may result in premature wear of  components due to the high stress placed on  the vehicle     Did not use Launch Control during the break   in  refer to page 162  period     To increase vehicle stability  activate DSC  again as soon as possible     An experienced driver may be able to achieve  better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode     Requirements    Launch Control is available when the engine is  warmed up  that is  after uninterrupted driving  of at least 6 miles 10 km     To start with Launch Control do not steer the  steering wheel     12    Start with launch control  While the engine is running     Br  1     Press button or select with the    Driving Dynamics Control Sport      TRACTION is displayed in t
133. f which menu item is currently  selected  e g     Vehicle status       List of short commands of the voice activation  system  see Navigation  Entertainment  Com   munication Owner s Manual     Help dialog for the voice activation  system    Calling up help dialog    Help lt   Additional commands for the help dialog      gt   Help with examples   information about the  current operating options and the most im   portant commands for them are an   nounced      gt   Help voice activation   information about  the principle of operation for the voice acti   vation system is announced     One example  open the tone  settings    Via the main menu  The commands of the menu items are spoken  just as they are selected via the controller     1  Switch on the Entertainment sound output  if necessary     2  Press the button on the steering  wheel     3    Radio menuc  4    Audio settings      Via short command  The desired radio station can also be started  via a short command     1  Switch on the Entertainment sound output  if necessary          gt  Ba  wheel     Press the button on the steering    3  Audio settings      Setting the voice dialog   You can set whether the system should use  the standard dialog or a shorter version    In the shorter variant of the voice dialog  the  announcements from the system are issued in  an abbreviated form     Settings     Language Units     Speech type      S SS    Select the setting     AY iG Speech mode       Standard  Short       Adjusting the 
134. feature 328i  3281 xDrive  328d  328d xDrive  Tire size Pressure specifications Without high speed tuning feature  in bar PSI Tire size Pressure specifica   Specifications in      i i     l A tions in bar PSI  bar PSI with cold Specifications in       i Hh Ip  tires bar PSI with cold  225 50R1794V 2 21 32 2 7139 t bl  M S A S RSC 225 50R1794VM 2 4135 2 9142  225 50 R 17 94 H  S A S RSC  M S RSC 225 50 R 17 94H M  225 45R 1891Y 2 41 35 2 9  42  S RSC  RSC 225 45R1891VM 2 6 38  3 1 45  225 45 R 1895 V  S A S RSC  M S XL RSC 225 45 R 1891 Y  Front  225 50R17 2 21 32   RSC  94 W RSC   24135 225 45 R 1895 V M  Rear  255 45 R 17  S XL RSC  98 W RSC Front  225 50R17 2 4 135    Front  225 45R18 2 4135   94 W RSC   2 6138  91 Y RSC _ 24 35 Rear   Rear  255 40 R 18 299 45 R 17 98 W  95 Y RSC RSC  Front  225 40R19 2 4 35   Front  225 45R18 26 38     89 Y RSC i 26138 91 Y RSC   2 6 38  Rear  255 35 R 19 Rear   92 Y RSC 255 40 R 18 95 Y  RSC  189    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Mobility   Wheels and tires    Tire size    Front  225 40 R 19  89 Y RSC    Rear   255 35 R 19 92 Y  RSC    Front  225 35 R 20  90 Y XL RSC   Rear  255 30 R 20  92 Y XL RSC  Compact wheel    T 135 80 R 17 102  M    Pressure specifica   tions in bar PSI   2 6  38       2 8141    2  139      3 2   46    Speed up to a max  of  50 mph   80 km h    4 2 60    With high speed tuning feature    Tire size    Specifications in  bar PSI with cold  tires    225 50R1794HM 2 4 35     S RSC    225 45 R 1
135. fety related functions and systems     Car washes    Hints    Steam jets or high pressure washers    When using steam jets or high pressure  washers  hold them a sufficient distance away  and use a maximum temperature of  140   F 60   C     If the vehicle has a glass sunroof  ensure that a  distance of at least 31 5 inches 80 cm is main   tained  Holding them too close or using exces   sively high pressures or temperatures can  cause damage or preliminary damage that may  then lead to long term damage     Follow the user s manual for the high pressure  washer   lt     Cleaning sensors cameras with high   pressure washers    When using high pressure washers  do not  spray the exterior sensors and cameras  e g    Park Distance Control  for extended periods of  time and only from a distance of at least   12 in 30 cm      gt  Regularly remove foreign items such as  leaves in the area below the windshield  when the hood is raised      gt  Wash your vehicle frequently  particularly  in winter     Intense soiling and road salt can damage  the vehicle     Automatic car washes    Hints    gt  Give preference to cloth car washes or  those that use soft brushes in order to  avoid paint damage     gt  Make sure that the wheels and tires are not  damaged by the transport mechanisms     gt  Fold in the exterior mirrors  otherwise  they  may be damaged  depending on the width  of the vehicle     gt  Deactivate the rain sensor  refer to  page 67  to avoid unintentional wiper acti   vation   
136. ff when a certain driving  distance or speed is exceeded     Switch the system back on if necessary     With front PDC  switching on off  manually    FPA Press the button   PY      gt  On  the LED lights up    gt  Off  the LED goes out     Display    Signal tones    When approaching an object  an intermittent  tone is sounded that indicates the position of  the object  For example  if an object is de   tected to the left rear of the vehicle  a signal  tone sounds from the left rear speaker     The shorter the distance to the object be   comes  the shorter the intervals     If the distance to a detected object is less than  approx  10 in 25 cm  a continuous tone is  sounded     With front PDC  if objects are located both in   front of and behind the vehicle  an alternating   continuous signal is sounded    The signal tone is switched off     gt  When the vehicle moves away from an ob   ject by more than approx  4 in 10 cm      gt  When selector lever position P is engaged  on vehicles with automatic transmission     Volume    The volume of the PDC signal tone can be ad   justed similar to the tone and volume settings  of the radio     The setting is stored for the remote control  currently in use     Visual warning    The approach of the vehicle to an object can  be shown on the Control Display  Objects that  are farther away are displayed on the Control  Display before a signal tone sounds     A display appears as soon as Park Distance  Control  PDC  is activated     The rang
137. flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting     Switch off the engine during  longer stops    Switch off the engine during longer stops  e g    at traffic lights  railroad crossings or in traffic  congestion     Auto Start Stop function    The Auto Start Stop function of your vehicle  automatically switches off the engine during a  stop     If the engine is switched off and then restarted  rather than leaving the engine running con   stantly  fuel consumption and emissions are  reduced  Savings can begin within a few sec   onds of switching off the engine     In addition  fuel consumption is also deter   mined by other factors  such as driving style     road conditions  maintenance or environmental  factors     Switch off any functions that  are not currently needed    Functions such as seat heating and the rear   window defroster require a lot of energy and   reduce the range  especially in city and stop   and go traffic     Therefore  switch off these functions if they  are not actually needed     The ECO PRO driving program supports the  energy conserving use of comfort functions   These functions are automatically deactivated  partially or completely     Have maintenance carried  out    Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve  optimal vehicle economy and operating life   The maintenance should be carried out by  your service center     Also note the BMW Maintenance System  refer  to page 202     ECO PRO    The concept    ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves  o
138. for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Interior equipment          Front center console In the cargo area     a   ae sa            RENG  i    Raise the cap and remove the cover or ciga  The socket is located on the left side in the  rette lighter  Cargo area     In the front passenger footwell    USB interface for data  transfer    The concept    Connection for importing and exporting data  on USB devices  e g       gt  Personal Profile settings  refer to page 33    gt  Music collection     The socket is located below the glove com   gt  Importing Trips     partment  Note   For technical reasons  the USB port for data  transfer may be located in the glove compart   ment even in vehicles equipped with a naviga   tion system or TV  If there is a USB port in the  glove compartment  it is the USB port intended  for transferring data     Rear center console       Remove the cover     153  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Controls     Interior equipment    Overview       The USB interface is located in the glove com   partment     Overview    The USB interface is located in the center arm   rest     A    Notes  Observe the following when connecting      gt  Do not use force when plugging the con   nector into the USB interface      gt  Do not connect devices such as fans or  lamps to the USB interface      gt  Do not connect USB hard drives   Do not use the USB interface to recharge    external devices   Through loading system    The concept    The cargo area
139. formation generally  documents the state of a component  a mod   ule  a system or the environment      gt  Operating states of system components   fill levels for instance      gt  Status messages for the vehicle and from  its individual components  e g   wheel rota   tion speed  vehicle speed  deceleration   transverse acceleration      gt  Malfunctions and faults in important sys   tem components  e g   lights and brakes      gt  Responses by the vehicle to special situa   tions  e g   deployment of an airbag  en   gagement of stability control systems      gt  Ambient conditions  such as temperature     This data is purely technical in nature and is  used to detect and correct faults and to opti   mize vehicle functions  Motion profiles over  routes traveled cannot be created from this  data  When service offerings are used  e g   re   pair services  service processes  warranty  claims  quality assurance  this technical infor   mation can be read out from the event and  fault memories by the service personnel  in   cluding the manufacturer  using special diag   nostic tools  You can obtain further information  there if it is needed  After a fault is corrected   the information in the fault memory is deleted  or overwritten on a continuous basis     When the vehicle is in use  situations are con   ceivable in which it might be possible to asso   ciate this technical data with individuals if it is  combined with other information  e g   an acci   dent report  damage to the v
140. four fasteners are engaged     2  Attach the cover under the rubber lip and  then thread it between the bars        3  Press down on the holder and tighten the  three screws     In the cargo area         2  ie    Ea  si         Raise the cargo floor panel     214  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Breakdown assistance   Mobility      Breakdown assistance    Vehicle equipment Hints   All standard  country specific and optional Emergency Request not guaranteed  equipment that is offered in the model series is For technical reasons  the Emergency  described in this chapter  Therefore  equip  Request cannot be guaranteed under unfavor     ment is also described that is not available in a able conditions  lt   vehicle  e  g   because of the selected optional    equipment or country variant  This also applies Initiating an Emergency Request  for safety related functions and systems  a            Hazard warning flashers    Press the cover briefly to open it     Press the SOS button until the LED in the  button lights up      gt  The LED lights up  an Emergency Request  was initiated     The button is located in the center console     If the situation allows  wait in your vehicle       until the voice connection has been estab   Intelligent Emergency ished     Request  gt  The LED flashes when a connection to the      BMW Response Center has been estab   Requirements lished      gt  The radio ready state is switched on  When the emergency request is received     
141. g  left 50 10 Air distribution  right   2 Temperature  left 11 Air flow  AUTO intensity   3 AUTO program 12 Air distribution  left   4 Display 13 Rear window defroster   5 Maximum cooling 14 Interior temperature sensor     always keep   6 Temperature  right clear   7 Seat heating  right 50 15 Defrosting windows and removing conden   l l sation   8 Cooling function   9 Automatic recirculated air control recircu    lated air mode  Climate control functions in detail sary by increasing the cooling or heating out   put  and then keeps it constant   Temperature Avoid rapidly switching between different tem     Turn the wheel to set the de  perature settings  Otherwise  the automatic cli   N  sired temperature  mate control will not have sufficient time to ad   just the set temperature     AUTO program       The automatic climate control reaches this    AUTO  Press the button   temperature as quickly as possible  if neces     144  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Climate control   Controls    Air flow  air distribution  and temperature are  controlled automatically     Depending on the selected temperature   AUTO intensity program and outside influen   ces  the air is directed to the windshield  side  windows  upper body  and into the footwell     The cooling function  refer to page 145  is  switched on automatically with the AUTO pro   gram     At the same time  a condensation sensor con   trols the program so as to prevent window  condensation as much as pos
142. ge  u neutral for engine stop     Indications on the Control Display    EfficientDynamics   Information on fuel consumption and technol   ogy can be displayed during driving    1   Vehicle Info     2   EfficientDynamics     Displaying fuel consumption history    The average fuel consumption can be dis   played within an adjustable time frame     Vertical bars show consumption for the se   lected time frame     Trip interruptions are represented below the  bar on the time axis     171    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Driving tips    Pkg Saving fuel    lhl  Consumption history     Adjusting fuel consumption history  time frame    lai Select the symbol     Resetting fuel consumption history  1  Open  Options    2   Reset consumption history     Displaying EfficientDynamics info  The current efficiency can be displayed   el   EfficientDynamics info    The following systems are displayed     gt  Automatic engine Start Stop function    gt  Energy recovery     gt  Climate control output     gt  Coasting     Display ECO PRO tips   i   ECO PRO Tips     The setting is stored for the profile currently in  use     Coasting    The concept  The system helps to conserve fuel     To do this  under certain conditions the engine  is automatically decoupled from the transmis   sion when selector lever position D is engaged   The vehicle continues traveling with the engine  idling to reduce fuel consumption  Selector  lever position D remains engaged     This driving con
143. ge load capacity  is 400 Ibs  1 000 Ibs minus 600 Ibs     400 Ibs     Determine the combined weight of lug   gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi   cle  That weight may not safely exceed the  available cargo and luggage load capacity  calculated in Step 4     165    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Driving tips   djs Loading       ILA    Max  Load    IA    Max  Load    IA    Max  Load    RARER   C    The maximum load is the sum of the weight of  the occupants and the cargo     The greater the weight of the occupants  the  less cargo that can be transported     Stowing cargo     gt     Cover sharp edges and corners on the  cargo     Heavy cargo  stow as far forward as possi   ble  directly behind and at the bottom of  the rear passenger seat backrests     Very heavy cargo  when the rear seat is not  occupied  secure each of the outer safety  belts in the opposite buckle     If necessary  fold down the rear backrests  to stow cargo     Do not stack cargo above the top edge of  the backrests     166    Securing cargo    Lashing eyes in the cargo area          To secure the cargo there are four lashing  eyes in the cargo area     Floor net    The floor net can also be used to Secure the  load and to store small parts        Hook the floor net into the fittings in the cargo  area floor     Securing cargo    gt  Smaller and lighter items  secure with re   taining straps or draw straps     gt  Larger and heavy objects  secure with  Cargo Straps    Attach the
144. ghter  than the vehicle being towed  otherwise   it will not be possible to control the vehicle  response     Tow truck       Your vehicle should be transported with a tow  truck with a so called lift bar or on a flat bed     Do not lift the vehicle    Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or  body and chassis parts  otherwise  damage  may result     Automatic transmission  transporting  your vehicle    Note    Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed   Therefore  contact a service center in the  event of a breakdown     Do not have the vehicle towed    Have your vehicle transported on a load   ing platform only  otherwise  damage may oc   cur  lt     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Breakdown assistance   Mobility      Tow truck       The vehicle should only be transported ona  loading platform     Do not lift the vehicle       Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or  body and chassis parts  otherwise  damage  may result     Use the tow fitting screwed in at the front for  maneuvering the vehicle only     Towing other vehicles    General information    Light towing vehicle       The towing vehicle must not be lighter  than the vehicle being towed  otherwise  it will  not be possible to control the vehicle re   sponse  lt     Attaching the tow bar tow rope correctly    Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow  fitting  connecting it to other vehicle parts may  cause damage         gt  Switch on the hazard warning system  de   pending on loca
145. gine and road  speed      gt  For gasoline engine 4 500 rpm and  100 mph 160 km h      gt  For diesel engine 3 500 rom and  93 mph 150 km h     Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum   stances     From 1 200 miles 2 000 km    The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be  increased     Tires    Due to technical factors associated with their  manufacture  tires do not achieve their full  traction potential until after an initial breaking   in period     162    Drive conservatively for the first  200 miles 300 km     Brake system    Brakes require an initial break in period of ap   prox  300 miles 500 km to achieve optimized  contact and wear patterns between brake  discs and brake pads  Drive moderately during  this break in period     Clutch    The function of the clutch reaches its optimal  level only after a distance driven of approx   300 miles 500 km  During this break in period   engage the clutch gently     Following part replacement    The same breaking in procedures should be  observed if any of the components mentioned  above have to be renewed in the course of the  vehicle s operating life     General driving notes    Closing the trunk lid    Drive with the trunk lid closed    Only drive with the tailgate closed  other   wise  in the event of an accident or braking and  evasive maneuvers  passengers and other road  users may be injured  and the vehicle may be  damaged  In addition  exhaust fumes may en   ter the passenger compartment   lt     If driving with t
146. gt  The Assist system is functional  at the BMW Response Center  the BMW   gt  The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has Response Center contacts you and takes  been activated  further steps to help you   Even if you are unable to respond  the  General information BMW Response Center can take further  Only press the SOS button in an emergency  steps to help you under certain circum   stances     For this purpose  data that are used to de   termine the necessary rescue measures   such as the current position of the vehicle    215  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14       Mobility Breakdown assistance    if it can be established  are transmitted to Storage  the BMW Response Center     gt  Ifthe LED is flashing  but the BMW Re   sponse Center can no longer be heard via  the speaker  you can nevertheless still be  heard for the BMW Response Center     Initiating an Emergency Request  automatically    Under certain conditions  an Emergency Re        quest is automatically initiated immediately af  The first aid kit is located in the cargo area ina  ter a severe accident  Automatic Collision Noti  storage compartment   fication is not affected by pressing the SOS  button   Roadside Assistance    Warning triangle a   Service availability   Roadside Assistance can be reached around  the clock in many countries  You can obtain as   sistance there in the event of a vehicle break   down     Roadside Assistance    The Roadside Assistance phone number can  AN     MA be v
147. h cold RERFR  O  tires    i    3 2   46    Tire size    225 45R1891Y 2 7 39    RSC    225 50 R17 94H  M S RSC    225 45 R 18 95 V  M S XL RSC   Front  225 45R18 2 7 39     91 Y RSC   2 8  41  Rear  255 40 R 18   95 Y RSC   Front  225 40R19 2 7 39     89 Y RSC 3 0  44    Rear  255 35 R 19  92 Y RSC    Tire size Pressure specifications  in bar PSI   Front  225 35 R20 2 9 42     90 Y XL RSC 7 34149   Rear  255 30 R 20   92 Y XL RSC   Compact wheel Speed up to a max  of    T 135 80 R 17 102 20 mph   80 km h  M 4 2160    Tire identification marks    Tire size   245 45 R 18 96 Y   245  nominal width in mm   45  aspect ratio in     R  radial tire code   18  rim diameter in inches   96  load rating  not for ZR tires   Y  speed rating  before the R on ZR tires    Speed letter   Q   up to 100 mph  160 km h  R  up to 106 mph  170 km h  S   up to 112 mph  180 km h  T upto 118 mph  190 km h  H   up to 131 mph  210 km h  V  up to 150 mph  240 km h  W   up to 167 mph  270 km h  Y   up to 186 mph  300 km h    Tire Identification Number   DOT code  DOT xxxx xxx 0814   xxxx  manufacturer code for the tire brand  xxx  tire size and tire design   0814  tire age    191    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14       Mobility Wheels and tires    Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of  the U S  Department of Transportation     Tire age  DOT     0814  the tire was manufactured in the  8th week of 2014     Recommendation    Regardless of wear  replace tires at least every  6 years  
148. h while the system is in   terrupted     When the system is switched on  the current  speed is maintained and stored as the desired  speed    This is displayed  refer to page 123  in the  speedometer and briefly in the instrument  cluster     When cruise control is maintained or stored   DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on   if necessary     Changing  maintaining  and storing  the speed    The rocker switch can be pressed while the  system is interrupted to maintain and store the  current speed  DSC Dynamic Stability Control  is switched on  if necessary     Adapting the desired speed    Adapt the desired speed to the road con   ditions and be ready to brake at all times  oth   erwise  there is the danger of an accident oc   curring     Speed differences    Large differences in speed relative to ve   hicles ahead of the vehicle cannot be compen   sated by the system for example in the follow   ing situations    gt  When quickly approaching a slowly moving   vehicle      gt  When another vehicle suddenly swerves  into the wrong lane        Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly  until the desired speed is set     121    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Controls     Driving comfort    If active  the displayed speed is stored and the  vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is  clear      gt  Each time the rocker switch is pressed to  the point of resistance  the desired speed  increases or decreases by approx   1 mph 1 km h      gt  Ea
149. he cargo area     Floor net    The floor net can also be used to Secure the  load  refer to page 166  and to store small  parts     Storage compartment under cargo  floor panel    Maximum load    To avoid damage to the vehicle  do not  exceed a maximum permitted load of 44 Ibs   20 kg in the storage compartment under the  cargo floor panel  lt        Raise the cargo floor panel  arrow 1  and latch  at top  if necessary  arrow 2     Partitioning the compartment    The compartment can be divided using an at   tachable partition     159    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14             Driving tips    This chapter provides you with information  useful in dealing with specific driving and  operating modes        Driving tips _ eka Things to remember when driving    Things to remember when driving    Vehicle equipment    All standard  country specific and optional  equipment that is offered in the model series is  described in this chapter  Therefore  equip   ment is also described that is not available in a  vehicle  e  g   because of the selected optional  equipment or country variant  This also applies  for safety related functions and systems     Breaking in period    General information    Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to  each other     The following instructions will help achieve a  long vehicle life and good economy     Engine and differential  Always obey the official speed limit     Up to 1 200 miles 2 000 km    Do not exceed the maximum en
150. he curvature is shifted up   down      Ais            Backrest width    Change the width of the back   rest using the side wings to ad   just the lateral support        49  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Controls     Adjusting    Front seat heating       Switching on  af Press the button once for each tem   perature level     The maximum temperature is reached when  three LEDs are lit     If the drive is continued within approx  15 mi   nutes  the seat heating is activated automati   cally with the temperature selected last     When ECO PRO  refer to page 169  is acti   vated  the heater output is reduced     Switching off    Press the button longer   The LEDs go out     Rear seat heating                                 _              S    Switching on    al Press the button once for each tem   perature level     The maximum temperature is reached when  three LEDs are lit     50       If the drive is continued within approx  15 mi   nutes  the seat heating is activated automati   cally with the temperature selected last     When ECO PRO  refer to page 169  is acti   vated  the heater output is reduced     Switching off    Press the button longer   The LEDs go out        Safety belts    Seats with safety belt    The vehicle has five seats  each of which is  equipped with a safety belt     Number of safety belts    Your vehicle has been fitted with five safety  belts for the safety of you and your passen   gers  However  they can only offer protection  w
151. he instrument  cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF  lights up    2  Engage gear S     3  With the left foot  forcefully press down on  the brake     Press and hold down the accelerator pedal  beyond the resistance point at the full  throttle position     A flag symbol appears in the instrument  cluster     5  The starting engine speed adjusts  Within  3 seconds  release the brake     Before using Launch Control  allow the trans   mission to cool down for approx  5 minutes     Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding  conditions  e g   wet pavement  when used  again     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Vehicle equipment    ment    All standard  country specific and optional  equipment that is offered in the model series is  described in this chapter  Therefore  equip       um etrr ina ANT Aleat A    r   Pe S i Sd l   ICI iC q 2E     bo  tO      Fuel gauge    Speedometer  Indicator warning lamps    mh WON      Tachometer       ment is also described that is not available in a  vehicle  e  g   because of the selected optional   equipment or country variant  This also applies  for safety related functions and systems           Engine oil temperature  Current fuel consumption  Electronic displays    ON OO O    Display reset miles    73    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14       AF TOYS T    mant el ektariuizanth ARHAANnRRrAN Fant  TAY as  w  Instrument cluster with enhanced features       Fuel gauge    Engine oil temperature  Speedom
152. he risk of severe accidents    The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot eval   uate non approved wheels and tires to deter   mine if they are suited for use  and therefore  cannot ensure the operating safety of the vehi   cle if they are mounted        Recommended tire brands       For each tire size  the manufacturer of your ve   hicle recommends certain tire brands  These  can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall     With proper use  these tires meet the highest  standards for safety and handling     194    New tires    Due to technical factors associated with their  manufacture  tires do not achieve their full  traction potential until after an initial breaking   in period    Drive conservatively for the first   200 miles 300 km     Retreaded tires    The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec   ommend the use of retreaded tires     Retreaded tires    Possibly substantial variations in the de   sign and age of the tire casing structures can  limit service life and have a negative impact on  road safety  lt     Winter tires    Winter tires are recommended for operating on  winter roads     Although so called all season M S tires do  provide better winter traction than summer  tires  they do not provide the same level of per   formance as winter tires     Maximum speed of winter tires    If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher  than the permissible speed for the winter tires   then display a corresponding sign in the field  of vision  You can obtain this sign
153. he tailgate open cannot be  avoided     gt  Close all windows and the glass sunroof    gt  Greatly increase the blower speed     gt  Drive moderately     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Things to remember when driving   Drivingtips tips    Hot exhaust system    Hot exhaust system    High temperatures are generated in the  exhaust system     Do not remove the heat shields installed and  never apply undercoating to them  Make sure  that flammable materials  e  g  hay  leaves   grass  etc  do not come in contact with the hot  exhaust system during driving  while in idle po   sition mode  or when parked  Such contact  could lead to a fire  and with it the risk of seri   ous personal injury as well as property dam   age    Do not touch hot exhaust pipes  otherwise   there is the danger of getting burned  lt     Diesel particulate filter    The diesel particulate filter collects soot parti   cles and burns them periodically at high tem   peratures     During the cleaning time of several minutes   the following may occur      gt  Temporarily  the engine may run less  smoothly      gt  Noises and a slight amount of smoke com   ing from the exhaust until shortly after the  engine is shut down      gt  Asomewhat higher engine speed is neces   sary to achieve the accustomed perform   ance     Mobile communication devices in the  vehicle    Mobile communication devices in the ve   hicle    It is advised that you do not use mobile com   munication devices  e g   mob
154. hen adjusted correctly     Hints    Always make sure that safety belts are being  worn by all occupants before driving away     To protect the occupants  the belt locking trig   gers early  Slowly guide the belt out of the  holder when applying it     Although airbags enhance safety by providing  added protection  they are not a substitute for  safety belts      gt  The upper shoulder strap s anchorage  point will be correct for adult seat occu   pants of every build if the seat is correctly  adjusted      gt  The two outer safety belt buckles   integrated into the rear seat  are for pas   sengers sitting on the left and right      gt  The center rear seat belt buckle is solely  intended for the center passenger     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Adjusting   Controls    One person per safety belt       Never allow more than one person to  wear a single safety belt  Never allow infants or  small children to ride on a passenger s lap  lt     Putting on the belt    Lay the belt  without twisting  snugly  across the lap and shoulders  as close to the  body as possible  Make sure that the belt lies  low around the hips in the lap area and does  not press on the abdomen  Otherwise  the belt  can slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal  impact and injure the abdomen     The safety belt must not lie across the neck   rub on sharp edges  be routed over breakable  objects  or be pinched  lt     Reduction of restraining effect    Avoid wearing bulky cloth
155. hen driving very close to the vehicle in  front of you     When driving toward bright lights     When the windshield in front of the interior  rearview mirror is fogged over  dirty or cov   ered with stickers  etc      gt  During calibration of the camera immedi   ately after vehicle shipment     Active Blind Spot Detection    The concept       Two radar sensors below the rear bumper  monitor the area behind and next to the vehicle  at speeds above approx  30 mph 50 km h     The system indicates whether there are vehi   cles in the blind spot  arrow 1  or approaching  from behind on the adjacent lane  arrow 2     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Controls     Safety    The lamp in the exterior mirror housing lights  up dimly     Before you change lanes after setting the turn  signal  the system issues a warning in the sit   uations described above    The lamp in the housing of the exterior mirror  flashes and the steering wheel vibrates     Hints    Personal responsibility    The system does not serve as a substi   tute for the driver s personal judgment of the  traffic situation     Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi   cle s surroundings at all times  otherwise an  accident is still possible despite all warnings   lt     Ata glance    Button in the vehicle             Active Blind Spot Detection    112    Radar sensors       The radar sensors are located under the rear  bumper     Switching on off   A  Press the button    gt  On  the LED ligh
156. her parties  such as law enforce   ment  could combine the EDR data with the  type of personally identifying data routinely ac   quired during a crash investigation     To read data recorded by an EDR  special  equipment is required  and access to the vehi   cle or the EDR is needed  In addition to the ve     hicle manufacturer  other parties  such as law  enforcement  that have the special equipment   can read the information if they have access to  the vehicle or the EDR     Reporting safety defects    For US customers    The following only applies to vehicles owned  and operated in the US     If you believe that your vehicle has a defect  which could cause a crash or could cause in   jury or death  you should immediately inform  the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis   tration NHTSA  in addition to notifying BMW of  North America  LLC  P O  Box 1227  West   wood  New Jersey 07675 1227  Telephone  1 800 831 1117     If NHTSA receives similar complaints  it may  open an investigation  and if it finds that a  safety defect exists in a group of vehicles  it  may order a recall and remedy campaign     However  NHTSA cannot become involved in  individual problems between you  your dealer   or BMW of North America  LLC     To contact NHTSA  you may call the Vehicle  Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236   TTY  1 800 424 9153   go to http     www safercar gov  or write to  Administrator   NHTSA  400 Seventh Street  SW   Washing   ton  DC 20590  You can also obtain other 
157. his  reason  use antifreeze     Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is  empty  otherwise  you could damage the  pump     Windshield washer nozzles    The windshield washer nozzles are automati   cally heated while the ignition is switched on     68    Fold out position of the wipers    Required when changing the wiper blades or  under frosty conditions  for example     1  Switch the ignition on and off again     2  Under frosty conditions  ensure that the  wiper blades are not frozen onto the wind   shield     3  Press the wiper lever up beyond the point  of resistance and hold it for approx  3 sec   onds  until the wiper remains in a nearly  vertical position     After the wipers are folded back down  the  wiper system must be reactivated     Fold the wipers back down    Before switching the ignition on  fold the  wipers back down to the windshield  other   wise  the wipers may become damaged when  they are switched on  lt     Switch on the ignition     2  Press the wiper levers down  The wipers  move to their resting position and are  ready for operation     Washer fluid    General information    Antifreeze for washer fluid    Antifreeze is flammable and can cause  injury if it is used incorrectly   Therefore  keep it away from sources of igni   tion     Only keep it in the closed original container  and inaccessible to children     Follow the notes and instructions on the con   tainer     United States  The washer fluid mixture ratio is  regulated by the U S  EPA and
158. hout the pinch protection  system    Keep the closing path clear    Monitor the closing process and make  sure that the closing path of the window is  clear  otherwise  injuries may result  lt     For example  if there is an external danger or if  ice on the windows prevents a window from  closing normally  proceed as follows     1  Pull the switch past the resistance point  and hold it there     The pinch protection is limited and the  window reopens slightly if the closing force  exceeds a certain value     2  Pull the switch past the resistance point  again within approx  4 seconds and hold it  there    The window closes without pinch protec   tion     Safety switch   The safety switch in the driver s door can be  used to prevent children  for example  from  opening and closing the rear windows using  the switches in the rear     44    Switching on and off    Press the button     The LED lights up if the safety func   tion is switched on     Safety switch for rear operation    Press the safety switch when transport   ing children in the rear  otherwise  injury may  result if the windows are closed without super   vision   lt     Roller sunblinds  Roller sunblind for rear window    General information    If you are no longer able to move the roller sun   blind for the rear window after having activated  it anumber of times in a row  the system is  blocked for a limited time to prevent overheat   ing  Let the system cool     The roller sunblind for the rear window cannot  be
159. ibed that is not available in a 3  Press the controller    vehicle  e  g   because of the selected optional 4  Selecting desired range     equipment or country variant  This also applies    l  gt   Quick reference   for safety related functions and systems      gt   Search by pictures    gt   Owner s Manual     Integrated Owner s Manual Vest Vehicle info  in the vehicle   ae   Quick reference  The Integrated Owner s Manual can be dis  Search by pictures  played on the Control Display  The equipment       Owner s Manual    and functions that are in the vehicle are descri   G   Onboard info  bed therein  17 Trip computer    Vehicle status    Components of the Integrated  Owner s Manual    The Integrated Owner s Manual consists of Leafing through the Owner s Manual  three parts  which offer various levels of infor     mation or access possibilities        Page by page with link access    Turn the controller until the next or previous    Quick Reference Guide page is displayed     Located in the Quick Reference is important   information for the operation of the vehicle  the  operation of basic vehicle functions or for what  to do in the event of a flat tire  This information    Page by page without link access  Leaf through the pages directly while skipping    can also be displayed during driving  We Inks   Highlight the symbol once  Now simply press  Search by pictures the controller to leaf from page to page     Information and descriptions based on illustra  Leaf back   tions
160. ic and road conditions allow this     Controls at a glance    Control elements       1 Control Display    2 Controller with buttons and  depending on  the equipment version  with touchpad    16    Control Display    Hints     gt  To clean the Control Display  follow the  care instructions      gt  Donot place objects close to the Control  Display  otherwise  the Control Display can  be damaged     Switching off       Press the button    2   Switch off control display   yo Options   EY Split screen    Switch off control display    lt   Profile settings      j Display Owner s Manual  Reset current profile  Rename current profile       Switching on    Press the controller again to switch the screen  back on     Controller with navigation system    The buttons can be used to open the menus  directly  The controller can be used to select  menu items and create the settings     Some iDrive functions can be operated using  the touchpad on the controller     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14       At a glance          Press the but  Function    ton   TEL Opens the Telephone menu   BACK Displays the previous panel   OPTION Opens the Options menu     Controller without navigation system    The buttons can be used to open the menus  directly  The controller can be used to select  menu items and create the settings     1  Turn         3  Move in four directions     Press the but  Function    ton   MENU Open the main menu    RADIO Opens the Radio menu    MEDIA Opens the 
161. ice center or a work   shop that operates in accordance with the  specifications of the vehicle manufacturer with    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Maintenance   Mobility      correspondingly trained personnel and other  authorized persons  Otherwise  use may result  in operating problems for the vehicle  lt     Position       There is an OBD socket on the driver s side for  checking the primary components in the vehi   cle emissions     Emissions    service   gt  The warning lamp lights up     ENGINE     es  SOON Emissions are deteriorating  Have    the vehicle checked as soon as  cr possible     Canadian model  warning light indi   cates the engine symbol      gt  The warning lamp flashes under certain  circumstances     This indicates that there is excessive mis   firing in the engine    Reduce the vehicle speed and have the  system checked immediately  otherwise   serious engine misfiring within a brief pe   riod can seriously damage emission con   trol components  in particular the catalytic  converter     203  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14       Mobility   Replacing components    Replacing components    Vehicle equipment    All standard  country specific and optional    equipment that is offered in the model series is    described in this chapter  Therefore  equip   ment is also described that is not available in a  vehicle  e  g   because of the selected optional  equipment or country variant  This also applies  for safety 
162. icle  there  Further information can be obtained  from your Service Centre     Maintenance and repairs    Advanced technology  e g   the use of modern  materials and high performance electronics   requires suitable maintenance and repair  methods     Therefore  have this work performed only by a  BMW center or a workshop that works accord   ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri   ately trained personnel     If this work is not carried out properly  there is  the danger of subsequent damage and related  safety hazards     Parts and accessories    BMW recommends using parts and accesso   ries approved by BMW for this purpose     Your BMW center is the right contact for genu   ine BMW parts and accessories  other prod   ucts approved by BMW and related qualified  advice     BMW has tested these products for safety and  suitability in relation to BMW vehicles     BMW can assume responsibility for them   However  we cannot assume any responsibility  whatsoever for parts and accessories that have  not been specifically approved by BMW     BMW cannot evaluate whether each individual  product from another manufacturer can be  used with BMW vehicles without presenting a  safety hazard  This guarantee is also not appli   cable when country specific government ap   proval has been granted  Testing of this kind  may fail to embrace the entire range of poten   tial operating conditions to which components  might be exposed on BMW vehicles  Such  products could conceivably fail to com
163. ied     Set the language  refer to page 86     24       Using voice activation    Activating the voice activation system       _       1  Mai       Press the button on the steering    wheel     2  Wait for the signal   3  Say the command     The command is displayed in the instru   ment cluster           This symbol in the instrument cluster indi   cates that the voice activation system is active     If no other commands are available  operate  the function in this case via iDrive     Terminating the voice activation  system       Briefly press the button on the steer   ing wheel or    gt End       Possible commands    Most menu items on the Control Display can  be voiced as commands     The available commands depend on which  menu is currently displayed on the Control Dis   play    Short commands exist for many functions     Some list entries  e g   Phone book entries  can  also be selected via the voice activation sys   tem  Speak these list entries exactly as they  are displayed in the respective list     Having possible commands read aloud  You can have the available commands read out  loud for you    commands     For example  if the  Settings  menu is dis     played  the commands for the settings are  read out loud     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Voice activation system   Ataglance     a glance    Executing functions using short  commands    Functions on the main menu can be performed  directly by means of short commands  nearly  irrespective o
164. iewed on the iDrive or a connection to  Roadside Assistance can be established di   rectly        The warning triangle is located on the inside of  the trunk lid     For additional information  see user s manual  To remove  loosen the bracket     for Navigation  Entertainment and Communi     cation   First aid kit  Jump starting  Note  Some of the articles have a limited service life  Notes  Check the expiration dates of the contents If the battery is discharged  an engine can be    started using the battery of another vehicle    regularly and replace any expired items i i  and two jumper cables  Only use jumper ca     promptly   bles with fully insulated clamp handles   To prevent personal injury or damage to both  vehicles  adhere strictly to the following proce   dure   216    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Breakdown assistance   Mobility    Do not touch live parts       To avoid the risk of potentially fatal in   jury  always avoid all contact with electrical  components while the engine is running     Preparation    1  Check whether the battery of the other ve   hicle has a voltage of 12 volts  This infor   mation can be found on the battery     2  Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi   cle     3  Switch off any electronic systems power  consumers in both vehicles   Bodywork contact between vehicles    Make sure that there is no contact be   tween the bodywork of the two vehicles  other   wise  there is the danger of short circuits     Star
165. ile phones  in   side the vehicle without connecting them di   rectly to the external antenna  Otherwise  the  vehicle electronics and mobile communication  devices can interfere with each other  In addi   tion  there is no assurance that the radiation    generated during transmission will be dis   charged from the vehicle interior     Hydroplaning  On wet or slushy roads  a wedge of water can  form between the tires and road surface     This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan   ing  It is characterized by a partial or complete  loss of contact between the tires and the road  surface  ultimately undermining your ability to  steer and brake the vehicle     Hydroplaning    When driving on wet or slushy roads  re   duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning  lt     Driving through water    Adhere to water depth and speed limita   tions    Do not exceed this water depth and walking  speed  otherwise  the vehicle s engine  the  electrical systems and the transmission may  be damaged  lt     Drive through calm water only and only if it is  not deeper than  9 8 inches 25 cm and at this  height  no faster than walking speed  up to   6 mph 10 km h     Braking safely    Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand   ard feature     Applying the brakes fully is the most effective  way of braking in situations when this is neces   Sary    The vehicle maintains steering responsive     ness  You can still avoid any obstacles with a  minimum of steering effort     Pulsation of the brake pe
166. in   formation about motor vehicle safety from  http  Awww safercar gov     For Canadian customers    Canadian customers who wish to report a  safety related defect to Transport Canada  De   fect Investigations and Recalls  may telephone  the toll free hotline 1 800 333 0510  You can  also obtain other information about motor vehi   cle safety from http   www tc gc ca roadsafety     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14                ae          Ataglance CELEUS  Cockpit  Cockpit    Vehicle equipment ment is also described that is not available in a  P l vehicle  e  g   because of the selected optional  All standard  country specific and optional equipment or country variant  This also applies    equipment that is offered in the model series is for safety related functions and systems   described in this chapter  Therefore  equip     All around the steering wheel       1 Rollersunblinds 44 AX Active Blind Spot Detec   2 Rear window safety switch 44 SM  tion 111  3 Powerwindows 43 p Intelligent Safety 102  4 Exterior mirror operation 54 SN  5 Glove compartment on the driver s Lane departure warning 110  side 156 7y  Driver assistance systems  6 Lamps    Front fog lamps 92    Parking lamps 89    ESS    12  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Cockpit   Ataglance     a glance    pe Low beams 89  2 Increase distance 122   p    Automatic headlamp con  Cruise control rocker switch 127  121  z0   a trol 90    l l 9 Instrument cluster 73  Daytime runn
167. ing  and pull  the shoulder belt periodically to readjust the  tension  Make sure that the belt is not jammed   otherwise  the belt can be damaged and the  restraining effect reduced     Buckling the belt        Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in  the belt buckle     Unbuckling the belt   1  Hold the belt firmly    2  Press the red button in the belt buckle   3  Guide the belt back into its reel     Safety belt reminder for driver s and  passenger s seat    AA   The indicator lamp lights up and a sig   nal sounds  Make sure that the safety  belts are positioned correctly  The  safety belt reminder is active at soeeds above  approx  6 mph 10 km h  It can also be activated    if objects are placed on the front passenger  seat     Damage to safety belts    In the case of strain caused by accidents or  damage     Have the safety belts  including the safety belt  tensioners  replaced and have the belt anchors  checked    Checking and replacing safety belts    Have the work performed only by your  service center  otherwise  it cannot be ensured  that this safety feature will function properly     Front headrests    Correctly adjusted head restraint  A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the  risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event  of an accident    Adjusting the head restraint    Correctly adjust the head restraints of all  occupied seats  otherwise  there is an in   creased risk of injury in an accident     Height    Adjust the head restraint so that its
168. ing distance is approx   50 miles 80 km     When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire   its handling characteristics change  e g   re   duced lane stability during braking  a longer  braking distance  and altered self steering  properties  Adjust your driving style accord   ingly  Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv   ing over obstacles  e g   curbs  potholes  etc     Because the possible driving distance de   pends on how the vehicle is used during the  trip  the actual distance may be smaller or  greater depending on the driving speed  road  conditions  external temperature  cargo load   etc     Continued driving with a flat tire    Drive moderately and do not exceed a  speed of 50 mph 80 km h     A loss of tire inflation pressure results ina  change in the handling characteristics  e g   re   duced lane stability during braking  a longer  braking distance and altered self steering  properties     Final tire failure    Vibrations or loud noises while driving  can indicate the final failure of the tire  Reduce  speed and stop  otherwise  pieces of the tire  could come loose and cause an accident  Do  not continue driving  and contact your service  center  lt     Required inflation pressure check  message    A Check Control message is displayed in the  following situations     gt  Thesystem has detected a wheel change   but no reset was carried out      gt  Inflation was not carried out according to  specifications      gt  The tire pressure has fallen below the leve
169. ing lights 90    Adaptive Light Control 90  High beam Assistant 91    10 Steering wheel buttons  right  Entertainment source    Instrument lighting 92  cr Volume  7 Steering column stalk     Voice activation 24  R    Turn signal 65    Telephone  see user s manual for  High beams  head  Navigation  Entertainment and  lamp flasher 65 Communication    High beam Assistant 91 Thumbwheel for selection lists 83    Oe  Vv  NS IHE    Tm  G    11 Steering column stalk  right    Roadside parking lamps 90 Windshield wipers 66           Computer 83 Rain sensor 67    Clean the windshields and head   lamps 68    Le   ep   or  D  D        Ke       gt   D  D  o     or  or  O     n  D       7    Store speed 125  119      80    Dn  m         12 pad Start stop the engine and switch  RES Resume speed 127  119  amp g    the ignition on off 62  A Auto Start Stop function 63  4  O Cruise control on off  interrupt  miil         ng 13 Horn   Active Cruise Control on off  in  14 Steering wheel heating 56  EK terrupting 119  amp     Reduce distance 122 15 Adjust steering wheel 56    16 Unlock hood 197    mh  _    13  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14       Ataglance GEIE  Cockpit    All around the center console       A OO Na    D  gt     oO o    Headliner 15   Control Display 16   Ventilation 146   Hazard warning system 215    Central locking system 37    Glove compartment 156    Radio CD Multimedia  see user s manual  for Navigation  Entertainment and Commu   nication    Climate cont
170. instru   ment cluster  e g   M1     Once maximum engine speed is attained  M S  manual mode is automatically upshifted as  needed     Switching to manual mode   gt  To shift down  press the selector lever for   ward      gt  To shift up  pull the selector lever rear   wards     Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine  and road speeds  e g   downshifting is not pos   sible if the engine speed is too high     The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in   strument cluster  followed by the current gear     Driving       Sport automatic transmission  prevent  automatic upshifting in M S manual  mode    For vehicles with Sport automatic transmis   sions  automatic shift operations are not per   formed  at maximum engine speed for exam   ple  if one of the following conditions is met      gt  DSC deactivated     gt  TRACTION activated     gt  SPORT  activated    In addition  the kickdown is deactivated     Ending the sport program manual  mode    Push the selector lever to the right   D is displayed in the instrument cluster     Shift paddles       The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow  you to shift gears quickly while keeping both  hands on the steering wheel     If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are  used to shift gears in automatic mode  the  transmission temporarily switches to manual  mode     If the shift paddles are not used and the vehicle  is not accelerated for a certain time  the sys   tem switches back into automatic mode if the  selector l
171. intenance procedures and le   gally mandated inspections are displayed     4  Select an entry to call up detailed informa     tion   Symbols  Sym  Description  bols    No service is currently required     The deadline for scheduled mainte   nance or a legally mandated inspec   tion is approaching     The service deadline has already  passed     e eS    Entering appointment dates  Enter the dates for the required inspections     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Displays   Controls    Ensure that the vehicle date and time are set  correctly     Vehicle Info     Vehicle status    6   o   Service required        Vehicle inspection     Date      Adjust the settings     eo fe SP e    Confirm   The entered date is stored     Automatic Service Request    Data regarding the service status or legally  mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto   matically transmitted to your service center  before a service due date     You can check when your service center was  notified     Vehicle Info     Vehicle status    Open  Options      eo a     Last Service Request     Gear shift indicator    The concept    The system recommends the most fuel effi   cient gear for the current driving situation     Depending on how the vehicle is equipped and  the country specific version of the vehicle  the  gear shift indicator is active in the manual  mode of the automatic transmission and in the  manual transmission     Indicators to shift up or down are displayed in  the instrument
172. interrupted or  distance control is deactivated be    cause the accelerator pedal is being  pressed  a vehicle was not detected        Distance display         Distance control is deactivated be        cause the accelerator pedal is being  pressed  a vehicle was detected     Rolling bars  the detected vehicle has driven  away     Indicator warning lamps    Personal responsibility   The indicator and warning lamps do not  relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt  his or her desired driving speed and style to  the traffic conditions     The vehicle symbol lights up orange     A vehicle has been detected ahead of    you     The vehicle symbol flashes orange     The conditions are not adequate for  operating the system   The system was deactivated but applies the  brakes until you actively resume control by    pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator  pedal     The vehicle symbol flashes red and an    acoustic signal sounds     You are requested to intervene by  braking or making an evasive maneuver     System limits    Speed range   Best results are achieved when using the sys   tem on well developed roads and highways   The system is functional at speeds beginning  at approx  20 mph 30 km h    The maximum speed that can be set depends  on the vehicle    The system can also be activated when sta   tionary     123    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Controls     Driving comfort    Comply with the legal speed limit in every sit   uation when using 
173. ion R     Deactivating    Slide the mirror changeover switch to the pas   senger side mirror position     Fold in and out  Press the button     Possible up to approx  15 mph 20 km h   For example  this is advantageous    gt  In car washes     gt  In narrow streets      gt  For folding back mirrors that were folded  away manually     Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto   matically at a speed of approx   25 mph 40 km h     Fold in the mirror in a car wash    Before washing the car in an automatic  car wash  fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or  with the button  otherwise  the mirrors could  be damaged  depending on the width of the  vehicle  lt     Automatic heating    Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated  whenever the engine is running     Automatic dimming feature    Both exterior mirrors are automatically dim   med  Photocells are used for control in the In   terior rear view mirror  refer to page 56     J9    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Adjusting       Interior rearview mirror  manually  dimmable    Turn knob       Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by  the interior mirror     Interior rearview mirror  automatic  dimming feature    The concept       Photocells are used for control      gt  Inthe mirror glass    gt  On the back of the mirror     Functional requirement  For proper operation    gt  Keep the photocells clean      gt  Do not cover the area between the inside  rearview mirror and the windshield     56  
174. is added  im   mediately have the vehicle checked  otherwise   this may cause engine damage        Protect children    Keep oil  grease  etc   out of reach of chil   dren and heed the warnings on the containers  to prevent health risks  lt     Oil types for refilling    Hints    No oil additives    Oil additives may lead to engine dam   age     Viscosity grades for engine oils   When selecting an engine oil  ensure that  the engine oil belongs to one of the viscosity  grades SAE OW 40  SAE OW 30  SAE 5W 40   and SAE 5W 30 or malfunctions or engine  damage may occur     The engine oil quality is critical for the life of  the engine     199    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14       Mobility Engine oil    Approved oil types  You can add oils with the following specifica   tions     Gasoline engine  BMW Longlife 01   BMW Longlife 01 FE     Diesel engine    BMW Longlife 04     Additional information about the approved  types of oils can be requested from the service    center     Alternative oil types   If the approved engine oils are not available  up  to 1 US quart liter of an oil with the following  specification can be added     Gasoline engine    API SM or superior grade specification     Diesel engine    API ILSAC GF 5     Engine oil change     The vehicle manufacturer recommends that  you let the service center change the motor oil     BMW recommends G   astrol    200  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Coolant   Mobility    Coolant   
175. ise may lead to  short term and  in most cases  temporary  hearing impairment in sensitive individuals     In the case of a malfunction  deactivation  and after triggering of the airbags    Do not touch the individual components imme   diately after the system has been triggered   otherwise  there is the danger of burns     Only have the airbags checked  repaired or dis   mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by  the service center or a workshop that has the  necessary authorization for handling explo   Sives     Non professional attempts to service the sys   tem could lead to failure in an emergency or  undesired triggering of the airbag  either of  which could result in injury  lt     Warnings and information on the airbags are  also found on the sun visors     Functional readiness of the airbag  system    F When the ignition is switched on  the  N warning lamp in the instrument cluster  lights up briefly and thereby indicates    the operational readiness of the entire airbag  system and the belt tensioner     Airbag system malfunctioning     gt  Warning lamp does not come on when the  ignition is turned on      gt  The warning lamp lights up continuously     95    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Controls     Safety    When there is a malfunction  have the  airbag system checked immediately       When there is a malfunction  have the airbag  system checked immediately  otherwise  there  is arisk that the system does not function as  expected in th
176. ith a damaged tire     1  Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu   vers     2  Donot exceed a speed of 50 mph 80 km h     3  Check the air pressure in all four tires at  the next opportunity     If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires  is correct  the Flat Tire Monitor may not  have been initialized  In this case  initialize  the system     Possible driving distance with complete loss of  tire inflation pressure     The possible driving distance after a loss of tire  inflation pressure depends on the cargo load  and the driving style and conditions     For a vehicle containing an average load  the  possible driving distance Is approx   50 miles 80 km     When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire   its handling characteristics change  e g   re   duced lane stability during braking  a longer  braking distance  and altered self steering  properties  Adjust your driving style accord   ingly  Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv   ing over obstacles  e g   curbs  potholes  etc     Because the possible driving distance de   pends on how the vehicle is used during the  trip  the actual distance may be smaller or    102    greater depending on the driving speed  road  conditions  external temperature  cargo load   etc     Continued driving with a flat tire    Drive moderately and do not exceed a  speed of 50 mph 80 km h     A loss of tire inflation pressure results ina  change in the handling characteristics  e g   re   duced lane stability during braking  a longer 
177. itions  When  a sporty driving style is used  the engine oil  consumption  for example  is clearly higher     Therefore  regularly check the engine oil level  after refueling     Depending on its engine  the vehicle is equip   ped with electronic oil measurement or meas   uring is done with a dipstick     The electronic oil measurement has two meas   uring principles      gt  Status display   gt  Detailed measurement    Checking the oil level  electronically    Status display    The concept    The oil level is monitored electronically during  driving and shown on the Control Display     If the oil level reaches the minimum level  a  check control message is displayed     198    Requirements    A current measured value is available after ap   prox  30 minutes of driving  During a shorter  trip  the status of the last  sufficiently long trip  is displayed     With frequent short distance trips  regularly  perform a detailed measurement     Displaying the oil level  1   Vehicle Info    2   Vehicle status    3  X     Engine oil level     Oil level display messages    Different messages appear on the display de   pending on the oil level  Pay attention to these  messages     If the engine oil level is too low  within the next  125 miles 200 km Add oil  refer to page 199   Engine oil level too low    Add oil immediately  otherwise  an insuf   ficient amount of engine oil could result in en   gine damage  lt     Take care not to add too much engine oil     Too much engine oil    Hav
178. ivating the functions    Several menu items are preceded by a check   box  It indicates whether the function is acti   vated or deactivated  Selecting the menu item  activates or deactivates the function     EY The function is activated   EJ The function is deactivated     Touchpad    Some iDrive functions can be operated using  the touchpad on the controller     Selecting functions  1   Settings   2   Touchpad   3  Select the desired function    gt   Speller   enter letters and numbers      gt   Interactive map   operating the inter   active map      Browser   enter Internet addresses      gt   Audio feedback   the entered letters  and numbers are announced     Entering letters and numbers    The entry of the letters requires some practice  at the beginning  In the entry  pay attention to  the following     19    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14       Ataglance GEIG  iDrive     gt  For the input of upper lower case letters  and numbers  it may be necessary to  switch via the controller to the correspond   ing Input mode  refer to page 23  e g   when the spelling of upper and lower case  letters is identical      gt  Enter characters as they are displayed on  the Control Display      gt  Always enter accompanying signs  such as  accents or periods so that the letter can be  clearly recognized  The possibility of input  depends on the set language  Where nec   essary  enter special characters via the  controller      gt  To delete a character  slide to the l
179. l   otherwise  there is the danger of getting  burned        Working on the lighting system    When working on the lighting system   you should always switch off the lights af   fected to prevent short circuits     To avoid possible injury or equipment damage  when replacing bulbs  observe any instructions  provided by the bulb manufacturer        Do not perform work bulb replacement  on xenon headlamps    Have any work on the xenon lighting system   including bulb replacement  performed only by  a service center  Due to the high voltage  present in the system  there is the danger of  fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly       Do not touch the bulbs    Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with  your bare hands  as even minute amounts of  contamination will burn into the bulb s surface  and reduce its service life     Use a clean tissue  cloth or something similar   or hold the bulb by its base  lt     Light emitting diodes  LEDs   Some items of equipment use light emitting    diodes installed behind a cover as a light  source     These light emitting diodes  which are related  to conventional lasers  are officially designated  as Class 1 light emitting diodes     Do not remove the covers    Do not remove the covers  and never  stare into the unfiltered light for several hours   otherwise  irritation of the retina could result  lt     Headlamp glass    Condensation can form on the inside of the ex   ternal lamps in cool or humid weather  When  driving with the light
180. l  of the last confirmation     In this case      gt  Check the tire pressure and correct as  needed      gt  Carry out a reset of the system after a tire  change     System limits    The system does not function properly if a re   set has not been carried out  e g   a flat tire is  reported even though the tire inflation pres   sures are correct     The tire pressure depends on the temperature  of the tire  If the tire temperature rises  e g    due to driving or because of the heat of the  Sun  the tire inflation pressure increases also   The tire pressure is reduced when the tire    99    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Controls     Safety    temperature falls again  This behavior may  cause a warning to be issued if temperatures  fall very sharply     Malfunction     The yellow warning lamp flashes and         then lights up continuously  A Check  Control message is displayed  No flat  tire or loss of tire pressure can be detected     Display in the following situations      gt  A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted   have the service center check it if neces   Sary     gt  Malfunction  have the system checked by  your service center      gt  TPM was unable to complete the reset   Reset the system again      gt  Disturbance by systems or devices with  the same radio frequency  after leaving the  area of the disturbance  the system auto   matically becomes active again     Declaration according to NHTSA   FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring  System
181. l regulations     gt  Ifthe electrical system has failed  clearly  identify the vehicle being towed by placing  a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win   dow     Tow bar    The tow fittings used should be on the same  side on both vehicles     Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting   the tow bar at an offset angle  please observe   the following     gt  Maneuvering capability is limited during  cornering     gt  The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it  is secured with an offset     Tow rope    When starting to tow the vehicle  make sure  that the tow rope is taut     To avoid jerking and the associated stresses  on the vehicle components when towing  al   ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps     Attaching the tow rope correctly    Only secure the tow rope on the tow fit   ting  otherwise  damage can occur when it is  secured on other parts of the vehicle  lt     Tow fitting       The screw in tow fitting should always be car   ried in the vehicle  It can be screwed in at the  front or rear of the BMW  It is in the onboard  vehicle tool kit located in a storage compart   ment on the right side in the cargo area  Open  the cover     Tow fitting  information on use     gt  Use only the tow fitting provided with  the vehicle and screw it all the way in      gt  Use the tow fitting for towing on paved  roads only     219    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Breakdown assistance        gt  Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting  e g   5  Sto
182. lance a glance    5  Turn the controller until  Time   is high   lighted  and then press the controller     e Time Date   Time  09 30  Format  24h       Date  27 05 2012    Format  ttemm            6  Turnthe controller to set the hours and  press the controller     7  Turnthe controller to set the minutes and  press the controller     Status information    Status field    The following information is displayed in the  status field at the top right     Time    Current entertainment source   Sound output  on off    Wireless network reception strength   Telephone status     VV VV VV    Traffic bulletin reception     Status field symbols  The symbols are grouped as follows     Radio symbols    HJ HD radio station is being received     Y Satellite radio is switched on           Telephone symbols    aia Incoming or outgoing call     Missed call        lll Wireless network reception  strength     Symbol flashes  network search      lll Wireless network is not available   3     Bluetooth is switched on        A Roaming is active    DA  Text message was received   m9 Check the SIM card    m   SIM card is blocked    ZA SIM card is missing     a  Enter the PIN        Entertainment symbols       CD DVD player      Music collection    Soe  Gracenote   database      AUX IN port    p USB audio interface       Mobile phone audio interface        Additional symbols    Wal Spoken instructions are switched  off        21    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14       Ataglance GE
183. lation  refer to Recir   culated air mode 142  145   Air  dehumidifying  refer to  Cooling function 142  145   Air distribution   manual 142  146   Air flow  air conditioner 142   Air flow  automatic climate  control 146   Air pressure  tires 185   Air vents  refer to Ventila   tion 146   Alarm system 41   Alarm  unintentional 43   All around the center con   sole 14   All around the headliner 15    232    All around the steering  wheel 12  All season tires  refer to Win   ter tires 194  All wheel drive 115  Alternating code hand held  transmitter 149  Alternative oil types 200  Antifreeze  washer fluid 68  Antilock Brake System   ABS 114  Anti slip control  refer to  DSC 114  Approved axle load 228  Approved engine oils 200  Arrival time 85  Ash tray 152  Assistance  Roadside Assis   tance 216  Assistance when driving  off 118  Assist system information  on  Control Display 87  AUTO intensity 145  Automatic car wash 221  Automatic climate con   trol 141  Automatic climate control  with enhanced features 144  Automatic Cruise Control  with Stop  amp  Go 119  Automatic Curb Monitor 55  Automatic deactivation  front  passenger airbags 96  Automatic headlamp con   trol 90  Automatic locking 41  Automatic recirculated air  control 145  Automatic transmission with  Steptronic 69    AUTO program  automatic cli   mate control 144   AUTO program  climate con   trol 142   AUTO program  intensity 145   Auto Start Stop function 63   Average fuel consumption 84   Average speed 84   Axle 
184. lay     Service data in the remote control    Information on the required maintenance is  continuously stored in the remote control   Your service center will read out this data and  suggest the right array of service procedures  for your vehicle     Therefore  hand your service specialist the re   mote control with which the vehicle was driven  most recently     202    Storage periods    Storage periods during which the vehicle bat   tery was disconnected are not taken into ac   count     If this occurs  have a service center update the  time dependent maintenance procedures   such as checking brake fluid and  if necessary   changing the engine oil and the microfilter   activated charcoal filter     Service and Warranty  Information Booklet for US  models and Warranty and  Service Guide Booklet for  Canadian models    Please consult your Service and Warranty In   formation Booklet for US models and Warranty  and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod   els for additional information on service re   quirements     Maintenance and repair should be performed  by your service center  Make sure to have reg   ular maintenance procedures recorded in the  vehicle s Service and Warranty Information  Booklet for US models  and in the Warranty  and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod   els  These entries are proof of regular mainte   nance     Socket for OBD Onboard  Diagnosis    Note    Socket for Onboard Diagnosis    The socket for onboard diagnostics may  only be used by the serv
185. letter is entered  and letters may be added automatically     The entries are continuously compared to the  data stored in the vehicle      gt  Only those letters are offered during the  entry for which data is available      gt  Destination search  town city names can  be entered using the spelling of language  available on the Control Display     23    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14       Ataglance Feeirlia me Voice activation system    Voice activation system    Vehicle equipment    All standard  country specific and optional  equipment that is offered in the model series is  described in this chapter  Therefore  equip   ment is also described that is not available in a  vehicle  e  g   because of the selected optional  equipment or country variant  This also applies  for safety related functions and systems     The concept     gt  Most functions that are displayed on the  Control Display can be operated by spoken  commands via the voice activation system   The system prompts you to make your en   tries      gt  Functions that can only be used when the  vehicle is stationary cannot be operated  using the voice activation system      gt  The system uses a special microphone on  the driver s side      gt          Verbal instructions in the Owner s  Manual to use with the voice activation  system     Requirements    Via the Control Display  set a language that is  also supported by the voice activation system  so that the sooken commands can be identi   f
186. ll     Acute warning with braking function    Warning of the imminent danger of a collision  when the vehicle approaches another object at  a relatively high differential speed     The driver must intervene actively when there  is an acute warning  If necessary  the driver is  assisted by an automatic braking intervention  in a possible risk of collision     The detection of objects can be influeneced by  technical system limitations  e  g  pedestrians  or stationary objects  Limitations of the detec   tion range and functional restricitions are to be  considered     The braking intervention is executed with lim   ited braking force and for a brief period only     The intervention can bring the vehicle to a  complete stop     The braking intervention is executed only if  DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on  and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti   vated     Above approx  130 mph 210 km h  the braking  intervention occurs as a brief braking pressure   No automatic delay occurs     Adapting your speed and driving style    The warning does not relieve the driver  of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving  speed and style to the traffic conditions  lt     The braking intervention can be interrupted by  pressing on the accelerator pedal or by actively  moving the steering wheel     Tow starting and towing    When tow starting and towing the vehi   cle  switch off the Intelligent Safety systems   otherwise  improper behavior of the braking  function of individual
187. lly swing out the trim     211  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Mobility   Replacing components    Replacing the reversing lamp and inner  brake lamp    1  Loosen the two holders  arrow 1 and pull  down on the lamp holder to remove  ar   row 2        2  Unscrew the defective bulb of the revers   ing or brake lamp from its socket counter   clockwise     3  Insert the new bulb     Installing the bulb holder    1  Slide the bulb holder onto the two guide  pins  arrow 1  Insert the two contacts  ar   row 2  into the connections  arrow 3        2  Press on the bulb holder  Make sure that  the two exterior holders latch into place     3  Swing the trim back onto the trunk lid and  secure     Tail lamp  license plate lamp and  central brake lamp    Follow general instructions  refer to page 204     These lamps are made using LED technology   Contact your service center in the event of a  malfunction     212       Changing wheels    Hints    The vehicle equipment does not include a  spare tire     When using run flat tires or tire sealants  a tire  does not need to be changed immediately in  the event of pressure loss due to a flat tire     The tools for changing wheels are available as  accessories from your service center     Jacking points for the vehicle jack       The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo   cated at the positions shown     Vehicle battery    Maintenance  The battery is maintenance free     The added amount of acid is sufficient for th
188. loads  weights 228    Backrest curvature  refer to  Lumbar support 49   Backrest  width 49   Band aids  refer to First aid  kit 216   Bar for tow starting   towing 219   Battery replacement  vehicle  battery 212   Battery replacement  vehicle  remote control 33   Battery  vehicle 212   Belts  safety belts 50   Beverage holder  cu   pholder 158   Blinds  sun protection 44   BMW Advanced Diesel 181   BMW Assist  see user s  manual for Navigation  En   tertainment and Communi   cation   BMW Homepage 6   BMW Internet page 6   BMW maintenance sys   tem 202   Bonus range  ECO PRO 170   Bottle holder  refer to Cu   pholder 158   Brake assistant 114    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Everything from A to Z   Reference        Brake discs  breaking in 162   Brake force display 113   Brake lamps  brake force dis   play 113   Brake lights  adaptive 113   Brake pads  breaking in 162   Braking  hints 163   Breakdown assis   tance 215  216   Breaking in 162   Brightness of Control Dis   play 87   Bulb replacement 204   Bulb replacement  front 205   Bulb replacement  halogen  headlamps 205   Bulb replacement  rear 210   Bulb replacement  xenon  headlamps 208   Bulbs and lamps 204   Button  RES 122   Button  Start Stop 61   Bypassing  refer to Jump   starting 216    C    California Proposition 65  Warning 7   Camera  care 224   Camera  rearview cam   era 131   Camera  Side View 133   Camera  Top View 135   Can holder  refer to Cu   pholder 158   Car battery 212   Car ca
189. m  features an alternating code system  Flashing    and continuous illumination of the LED will re   peat for approximately 20 seconds     For systems with an alternating code system   the universal garage door opener and the sys   tem also have to be synchronized     Please read the operating manual of the sys   tem being set up for information on how to  synchronize the system     Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec   ond person     To synchronize     1  Park the vehicle within range of the re   mote controlled system     2  Program the relevant button on the interior  rearview mirror as described     3  Locate and press the synchronizing button  on the system being programmed  You  have approx  30 seconds for the next step     4  Hold down the programmed button on the  interior rearview mirror for approximately  3 seconds and then release it  If necessary   repeat this work step up to three times in  order to finish synchronization  Once syn   chronization is complete  the programmed  function will be carried out     Reprogramming individual buttons  1  Switch on the ignition     2  Press and hold the interior rearview mirror  button to be programmed     3  Assoonas the interior rearview mirror LED  starts flashing slowly  hold the hand held  transmitter for the system to be controlled  approx  1 to 3 in 2 5 to 8 cm away from the  buttons on the interior rearview mirror  The  required distance depends on the manual  transmitter     4  Likewise  press and hold the
190. m 43   Fan  refer to Air  flow 142  146   Fault displays  refer to Check  Control 76   Filler neck for engine oil 199   Fine wood  care 223   First aid kit 216   Fitting for towing  refer to  Tow fitting 219   Flat tire  changing  wheels 212   Flat Tire Monitor FTM 100    Flat tire  Tire Pressure Moni   tor TPM 97   Flat tire  warning  lamp 98  101   Flooding 163   Floor carpet  care 224   Floor mats  care 224   Fogged up windows 142   Fold down the rear seat back   rest  see Though loading  system 154   Fold out position  windshield  wipers 68   Foot brake 163   Front airbags 94   Front fog lamps 92   Front fog lamps  bulb replace   ment 209   Front lamps 205   Front passenger airbags  au   tomatic deactivation 96   Front passenger airbags  indi   cator lamp 96   FTM Flat Tire Monitor 100   Fuel 180   Fuel cap 178   Fuel consumption  current 80   Fuel consumption  refer to  Average fuel consump   tion 84   Fuel filler flap 178   Fuel gauge 78   Fuel quality 180   Fuel recommendation 180   Fuel  tank capacity 231   Fuse 213    G    Garage door opener  refer to  Universal garage door  opener 148   Gasoline 180   Gear change  automatic  transmission 70   Gear shift indicator 81    General driving notes 162   Glass sunroof  powered 45   Glove compartment 156   Gross vehicle weight  ap   proved 228    H    Handbrake  refer to parking  brake 65   Hand held transmitter  alter   nating code 149   Hazard warning flashers 215   Head airbags 94   Headlamp control  auto   matic 90   Hea
191. may not be fully functional and  may provide incorrect information in the fol   lowing situations      gt  In heavy fog  rain or snowfall     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Displays   Controls     gt  When signs are concealed by objects     When driving very close to the vehicle in  front of you     When driving toward bright lights      gt  When the windshield behind the interior  rearview mirror is fogged over  dirty or cov   ered by a sticker  etc      gt  Inthe event of incorrect detection by the  camera      gt  Ifthe speed limits stored in the navigation  system are incorrect      gt  In areas not covered by the navigation sys   tem      gt  When roads differ from the navigation   such as due to changes in the road net   work      gt  When passing buses or trucks with a  speed sticker      gt  Ifthe traffic signs are non conforming     During calibration of the camera immedi   ately after vehicle shipment     Selection lists in the  instrument cluster    The concept    Depending on the equipment version  the fol   lowing can be displayed or operated using the  buttons and the thumbwheel on the steering  wheel and the displays in the instrument clus   ter and the Head up Display      gt  Current audio source    gt  Redial on telephone    gt  Activation of the voice activation system     In addition  programs of the Driving Dynamics  Control are displayed           Display    No One But You      V Rock   n Roll Boy    Shine A Light       Depending 
192. ment or country variant  This also applies  for safety related functions and systems     Hints    Overloading the vehicle    To avoid exceeding the approved carry   ing capacity of the tires  never overload the ve   hicle  Overloading can lead to overheating and  increases the rate at which damage develops  inside the tires  This could result in a sudden  loss of tire inflation pressure   lt     No fluids in the trunk    Make sure that fluids do not leak into the  trunk  otherwise  the vehicle may be dam   aged  lt        Heavy and hard objects    Do not stow any heavy and hard objects  in the passenger compartment without secur   ing them  otherwise  they may present a dan   ger to occupants  e g   during braking and eva   sive maneuvers     Determining the load limit    1  Locate the following statement on your ve   hicle   s placard      gt  The combined weight of occupants  and cargo should never exceed XXX kg  or YYY Ibs  Otherwise  damage to the    2     Loading MRP iitema es       vehicle and unstable driving situations  may result        Determine the combined weight of the  driver and passengers that will be riding in  your vehicle     Subtract the combined weight of the driver  and passengers from XXX kilograms or  YYY pounds     The resulting figure equals the available  amount of cargo and luggage load ca   pacity    For example  if the YYY amount equals  1 000 Ibs and there will be four 150 lbs  passengers in your vehicle  the amount of  available cargo and lugga
193. ment with the engine off     Power failure    After a temporary power loss  some equipment  needs to be reinitialized     Individual settings need to be reprogrammed      gt  Seat and mirror memory  store the posi   tions again     Time  update    gt  Date  update      gt  Navigation system  wait for the operability  of the navigation     Disposing of old batteries    Ry Have old batteries disposed of by your  service center or bring them to a recy   cling center     Maintain the battery in an upright position for  transport and storage  Secure the battery so  that it does not tip over during transport     Fuses    Hints    Replacing fuses    Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and  do not replace a defective fuse with a substi   tute of another color or amperage rating  this  could lead to a circuit overload  ultimately re   sulting in a fire in the vehicle     Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse  types and locations are stored in the fuse box  in the cargo area     In the engine compartment    1  Use the onboard vehicle tool kit to loosen  the three cover screws  arrow 1        2  Pull up the holder  arrow 2     213    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14       Mobility   Replacing components    3  Remove the cover from one side  arrow 3     4  Press the four fasteners and remove the  cover        Information on the fuse types and locations is  found on a separate sheet        Attaching the covers    1  When attaching the cover  make sure that  all 
194. mera im   age when in selector lever position R     Switching on off manually    gt  Help you to estimate the space required  when parking and maneuvering on level  roads     Py  Press the button        pe On ME eNOS Up   gt  Are dependent on the current steering an    gt  Off  the LED goes out  gle and are continuously adjusted to the  The PDC is shown on the Control Display  steering wheel movements     Switching on the rearview camera via  the iDrive    With PDC activated or Top View switched on   R   Rear view camera   The rearview camera image is displayed     131  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Controls     Driving comfort    Turning circle lines        gt  Can be shown in the rearview camera im     age    gt  Show the course of the smallest possible  turning circle on a level road      gt  Only one turning circle line is displayed af   ter the steering wheel is turned past a cer   tain angle     Obstacle marking    General information       Marks for detected obstacles can be shown in  the rearview camera image     Their colored steps match the markings of the  PDC  This simplifies estimation of the distance  to the object shown     132    Parking using pathway and turning  circle lines    1  Position the vehicle so that the turning cir   cle lines lead to within the limits of the  parking space        2  Turn the steering wheel to the point where  the pathway line covers the corresponding  turning circle line        Display settings    Brightne
195. messages    Additional information  such as on the cause of  a fault or the required action  can be called up  via Check Control     The supplementary text of urgent messages is  automatically displayed on the Control Display     Symbols    Depending on the Check Control message  the  following functions can be selected     11    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Controls     Displays     gt   Ji   Owner s Manual     Display additional information about the  Check Control message in the Integrated  Owner s Manual      gt     Service request   Contact your service center     gt   amp        Roadside Assistance   Contact Roadside Assistance     Hiding Check Control messages       Press the onboard computer button on the  turn signal lever      gt  Some Check Control messages are dis   played continuously and are not cleared  until the malfunction is eliminated  If sev   eral malfunctions occur at once  the mes   sages are displayed consecutively     These messages can be hidden for approx     8 seconds  After this time  they are dis   played again automatically      gt  Other Check Control messages are hidden  automatically after approx  20 seconds   They are stored and can be displayed  again later     Displaying stored Check Control  messages    1   Vehicle Info    2   Vehicle status    3  A  Check Control    4  Select the text message     78    Messages after trip completion    Special messages that are displayed during  driving are displayed again after
196. mic Stability  Control    The concept    DSC prevents traction loss in the driving  wheels when driving away and accelerating     DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi   tions  such as fishtailing or nose diving  Sub     114    ject to physical limits  DSC helps to keep the  vehicle on a steady course by reducing engine  speed and by applying brakes to the individual  wheels     Adjust your driving style to the situation    An appropriate driving style is always the  responsibility of the driver     The laws of physics cannot be repealed  even  with DSC     Therefore  do not reduce the additional safety  margin by driving in a risky manner  lt     Indicator warning lamps  The indicator lamp flashes  DSC con   2e  trols the drive forces and brake forces     The indicator lamp lights up  DSC has  failed     Deactivating DSC  DSC OFF    When DSC is deactivated  driving stability is  reduced during acceleration and when driving  in bends     To increase vehicle stability  activate DSC  again as soon as possible     Deactivating DSC    S or Press and hold the button  but not lon   ee ger than approx  10 seconds  until the  indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in     strument cluster and DSC OFF is displayed   The DSC system is switched off     Steering and  depending on the equipment   the chassis are adjusted for sporty driving     Activating DSC      a we  Press the button     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Driving stability control systems   
197. mirror position     34     gt  Driver s seat position  automatically re   trieved after unlocking     Collision warning  warning time      gt  Lane departure warning  last setting  on   off      gt  Active Blind Spot Detection  last setting   on off     Profile management    Opening the profiles   A different profile can be called up than the  one associated with the remote control cur   rently in use    1   Settings    2   Profiles    3  Select a profile     Called up profile is assigned to the remote  control being used at the time     Renaming profiles   1   Settings    2   Profiles    3  Open  Options     4   Rename current profile     Resetting profiles   The settings of the active profile are reset to  their default values     Settings     Profiles    Open  Options      me a     Reset current profile     Exporting profiles   Most settings of the active profile and the  saved contacts can be exported    This can be helpful for securing and retrieving    personal settings  before delivering the vehicle  to a workshop for example  The saved profiles    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Opening and closing   Controls    can be taken with you to another vehicle  equipped with the Personal Profile function     The following export options are available    gt  BMW Online    gt  Via the USB port to a USB device     Popular file systems for USB devices are  supported  FAT32 and exFAT are the rec   ommended formats for profile export   Other formats may not s
198. movement  of the remote controlled device  otherwise   there is a risk of injury or damage     Also follow the safety instructions of the hand   held transmitter   lt     Before selling the vehicle  delete the stored  functions for the sake of security     Compatibility  If this symbol is printed on the packag       ing or in the instructions of the system  to be controlled  the system is gener     148    ally compatible with the universal garage door  opener     If you have any questions  please contact    gt  Your service center    gt  www homelink com on the Internet     HomeLink is a registered trademark of John   son Controls  Inc     Controls on the interior rearview  mirror        gt  LED  arrow 1   Buttons  arrow 2      gt  The hand held transmitter  arrow 3  is re   quired for programming     Programming    General information  1  Switch on the ignition   2  Initial setup     Press and hold the left and right button on  the interior rearview mirror simultaneously  for approximately 20 seconds until the LED  on the interior rearview mirror flashes  This  erases all programming of the buttons on  the interior rearview mirror     3  Hold the hand held transmitter for the sys   tem to be controlled approx  1 to 3 in 2 5 to  8 cm away from the buttons on the interior    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Interior equipment   Controls    rearview mirror  The required distance de   pends on the manual transmitter     4  Simultaneously press and hold the 
199. mselves  lt        Opening and closing       Opening        gt  Press the switch to the resistance  point     The window opens while the switch is held         gt  Press the switch beyond the resist   ance point     The window opens automatically   Pressing the switch again stops the motion     Convenient opening  refer to page 35  via the  remote control     Closing    Keep the closing path clear    Monitor the closing process and make  sure that the closing path of the window is  clear  otherwise  injuries may result  lt         gt  Pull the switch to the resistance  point     The window closes while the switch is  held     l pen   gt  Pull the switch beyond the resistance  point     The window closes automatically   Pressing the switch stops the motion   Closing via Comfort Access  refer to page 39     43    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Controls     Opening and closing    Pinch protection system    If the closing force exceeds a specific value as  a window closes  the closing action is inter   rupted     The window reopens slightly     Danger of pinching even with pinch pro   tection  Even with the pinch protection system  check  that the window s closing path is clear  other   wise  the closing action may not stop in certain  situations  e g   if thin objects are present  lt     No window accessories    Do not install any accessories in the  range of movement of the windows  otherwise   the pinch protection system will be impaired     Closing wit
200. n 146   Ventilation  refer to Parked   car ventilation 147   Voice activation system 24    W    Warning indicators 76  Warning lamps 76  Warning messages  refer to  Check Control 76  Warning triangle 216  Washer fluid 68  Washer nozzles  wind   shield 68  Washer system 66  Washing  vehicle 221  Water on roads 163  Weights 228  Welcome lamps 89  Wheel base  vehicle 228  Wheel cleaner 223  Wheels  changing 193    Wheels  everything on wheels    and tires 185  Wheels  Flat Tire Monitor  FTM 100    Wheels  Tire Pressure Moni     tor TPM 97  Width  vehicle 228  Window defroster   rear 142  146  Windows  powered 43  Windshield washer fluid 68  Windshield washer noz   zles 68  Windshield washer sys   tem 66  Windshield wiper 66    Windshield wipers  fold out  position 68   Winter diesel 181   Winter storage  care 224   Winter tires  suitable  tires 194   Winter tires  tread 193   Wiper blades  replacing 204   Wiper fluid 68   Wiper system 66   Wood  care 223   Word match concept  naviga   tion 23   Wrench  see Onboard vehicle  tool kit 204    X    xDrive 115  Xenon headlamps  bulb re   placement 208    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    More about BMW       The Ultimate  bmwusa com Driving Machine    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    01 40 2 925 743 ue    
201. n fuel consumption  For this purpose  the en   gine control and comfort functions  e  g  the  climate control output  are adjusted     Under certain conditions the engine is auto   matically decoupled from the transmission in  the D selector lever position  The vehicle con   tinues traveling with the engine idling to re   duce fuel consumption  Selector lever position  D remains engaged     169    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Driving tips   ecm Saving fuel    In addition  context sensitive instructions can  be displayed that assist in driving in a manner  that optimizes fuel consumption     In the instrument display  the extension of the  range achieved by this can be displayed as a  bonus range     At a glance    The system includes the following  EfficientDynamics functions and displays      gt  ECO PRO bonus range  refer to page 170     gt  ECO PRO tips driving instruction  refer to  page 171    gt  ECO PRO climate control  refer to  page 170     gt  ECO PRO coasting driving status  refer to  page 172     gt  ECO PRO driving style analysis  refer to  page 173    Activate ECO PRO     i Press button repeatedly until ECO    PRO is displayed in the instrument    cluster    Configuring ECO PRO  Via the Driving Dynamics Control  1  Activate ECO PRO    2   Configure ECO PRO   3  Configure the program   Via the iDrive   1   Settings    2   ECO PRO mode    Or   1   Settings    2   Driving mode    3   Configure ECO PRO     Configure the program     170    E
202. n the side  of the vehicle representation  Parking as   sistant is activated and search for parking  space active     The status is displayed with symbols     Gray  parking space search     Blue  the system is activated  A  suitable parking space was  found      gt  Suitable parking spaces are displayed next  to the vehicle symbol at the edge of the  road as on the Control Display  When the  parking assistant is active  suitable parking  spaces are highlighted     p a coniro nasigeen  gt  The parking procedure is ac   an tive  Steering control has    been seized        The parking procedure is active        iS        gt  Parking space search is always active  whenever the vehicle is moving forwards  slow and straight  even if the system is de     138  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Driving comfort   Controls    activated  When the system is deactivated   the displays on the Control Display are  shown in gray     Parking using the parking assistant    Check the traffic situation as well    Loud sounds outside and within the vehi   cle can drown out the signal tones of the park   ing assistant and PDC     Check the traffic situation around the vehicle  with your own eyes  otherwise  there is the  danger of an accident     1  Switch on the parking assistant and acti   vate it if necessary     The status of the parking space search is  indicated on the Control Display    2  Follow the instructions on the Control Dis   play   To achieve the best possible pa
203. nd   Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models     Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and  designed to meet the particular operating con   ditions and homologation requirements in your  country and continental region in order to de   liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle  is operated under those conditions  If you wish  to operate your vehicle in another country or  region  you may be required to adapt your ve   hicle to meet different prevailing operating  conditions and homologation requirements   You should also be aware of any applicable  warranty limitations or exclusions for such  country or region  In such case  please contact  Customer Relations for further information     Maintenance    Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the  road safety  operational reliability and the New  Vehicle Limited Warranty     Specifications for required maintenance meas   ures      gt  BMW Maintenance system     gt  Service and Warranty Information Booklet  for US models     gt  Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for  Canadian models    If the vehicle is not maintained according to  these specifications  this could result in seri     8    ous damage to the vehicle  Such damage is  not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited  Warranty     Data memory    Many electronic components on your vehicle  are equipped with data memories that tempo   rarily or permanently store technical informa   tion about the condition of the vehicle  events  and faults  This technical in
204. nding turn signal  must be set where applicable  Switching on with the button    Py  Press the button       The LED lights up     Ata glance    Button in the vehicle    The current status of the parking space search  is indicated on the Control Display     gy Parking assistant is activated automatically     Switching on with the reverse gear  Shift into reverse     The current status of the parking space search  is indicated on the Control Display        To activate       Parking Assistant     Py  Parking assistant Switching off    The system can be deactivated as follows    gt  D Press the button      gt  Switch off the ignition     137  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Controls   Driving comfort    Display on the Control Display Status of the parking space search  System activated deactivated    Symbol Meaning    a  Gray  the system is not available     White  the system is available but  not activated        ey The system is activated     gt  Gray  arrow 1  parking space search   Status display  gt  Blue  arrow 2  parking space is suitable   Depending on the appointment version  differ  The vehicle is parked in the parking space  ent views of the status display are shown and if the parking procedure is active     are described below as View 1  refer to    i l ki h   page 138  or View 2  refer to page 138   gt  No display  no parking space searc    Status of the system  Display 1 Status of the system  Display 2        gt  Colored symbols  see arrows  o
205. nformation  iDrive 21  Status of Owner s Manual 6  Steering wheel  adjusting 56  Steering wheel heating 56  Steptronic  automatic trans   mission 69  Stopping the engine 62  Storage compartment in the  rear 158  Storage compartments 156  Storage compartments  loca   tions 156  Storage  tires 195  Storing the vehicle 224  Summer tires  tread 193  Supplementary text mes   sage     Surround View 130  Switch for Dynamic Driv   Ing 116  Switch on times  parked car  ventilation 147  Switch  refer to Cockpit 12  Symbols 6  Symbols in the status field 21         Tachometer 78   Tail lamp 210   Tail lamps 210  212   Technical changes  refer to  Safety 7   Technical data 228   Telephone  see user s manual  for Navigation  Entertain   ment and Communication   Temperature  automatic cli   mate control 142  144   Temperature display for ex   ternal temperature 79    Temperature  engine oil 78   Tempomat  refer to Active  Cruise Control 119   Terminal  starting aid 217   Text message  supplemen   tary 77   Theft alarm system  refer to  Alarm system 41   Thigh support 49   Through loading system 154   Tilt alarm sensor 42   Time of arrival 85   Tire damage 193   Tire identification marks 191   Tire inflation pressure 185   Tire inflation pressure moni   tor  refer to FTM 100   Tire Pressure Monitor  TPM 97   Tires  changing 193   Tires  everything on wheels  and tires 185   Tires  run flat tires 195   Tire tread 193   Tone  see user s manual for  Navigation  Entertainment  and Communication
206. nformation from the on   board computer is to be displayed on the info  display of the instrument cluster    1   Settings    2   Instr  cluster display    3  Select the desired displays     Information in detail    Range    Displays the estimated cruising range available  with the remaining fuel     It is calculated based on your driving style over  the last 20 miles 30 km     If there is only enough fuel left for less than  45 miles 80 km  the color of the display  changes     Average fuel consumption    The average fuel consumption is calculated for  the period during which the engine is running     The average fuel consumption is calculated for  the distance traveled since the last reset by the  onboard computer     Average speed    Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the  engine manually stopped do not enter into the  calculation of the average speed     Resetting average values    Press and hold the computer button on the  turn signal lever     Distance to destination   The distance remaining to the destination is  displayed if a destination is entered in the navi   gation system before the trip is started     The distance to the destination is adopted au   tomatically     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Displays   Controls    Time of arrival    The estimated time of arrival is  displayed if a destination is en   tered in the navigation system   before the trip is started          The time must be correctly set     Speed limit detection    
207. ng   1  Unlock the belt lock of the center safety 1  Return the rear seat backrest to the upright  belt in the rear using the latch plate of an  seating position and engage it   other safety belt     Ensure that the lock is securely en   2  Insert the latch plate at the end of the belt gaged    into the specially designated fixture on the  rear window shelf     Make sure that the lock engages properly  when folding back  otherwise transported  cargo could enter the passenger compart   ment during braking or evasive maneuvers  and endanger the vehicle occupants   lt     2  Release the belt tongue from the fixture on  the rear window shelf     3  Insert the belt tongue in the belt lock of the  center safety belt  Make sure you hear the  latch plate engage        3  Push the corresponding head restraint To secure cargo  refer to page 166  with nets  down as far as it will go  or draw straps  the cargo area is fitted with  lashing eyes     4  Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo    area to release the rear seat backrest  Folding down the middle section    1  Fold in the middle head restraint     2  Reach into the recess and pull the middle  section forward        5  The unlocked rear seat backrest moves  forward slightly     il        6  Fold backrest forward     155  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Controls     Storage compartments    Storage compartments    Vehicle equipment    All standard  country specific and optional  equipment that is offered in
208. ng to minimize fuel consumption for  maximum range with maximum driving stabili   zation     Comfort functions and the engine controller  are adjusted     The program can be configured to individual  specifications     Activating ECO PRO     i Press button repeatedly until ECO  PRO is displayed in the instrument  cluster     Configuring ECO PRO  1  Activate ECO PRO    2   Configure ECO PRO   Make the desired settings     Configuring drive program  Settings can be made for the following driving  programs in Driving mode      gt  SPORT  refer to page 117    gt  ECO PRO  refer to page 170     Displays    Program selection    Pressing the button displays a  list of the selectable programs     t    SPORT  e2    SPORT    COMFORT  ECO PRO    117    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Controls   Driving stability control systems    Selected program    The selected program is dis   played in the instrument cluster        Display on the Control Display  Program changes can be displayed on the  Control Display    1   Settings    2   Driving mode    3   Driving mode info     Drive off assistant    This system supports driving away on gradi   ents  The parking brake is not required     1  Hold the vehicle in place with the foot  brake     2  Release the foot brake and drive away  without delay     After the foot brake is released  the vehicle is  held in place for approx  2 seconds     Depending on the vehicle load or when a trailer  is being used  the vehicle may roll 
209. ng travel distance  Otherwise  you will  not be able to restart the engine after switch   ing it off  lt     Misfueling    A Check Control message is displayed when  an incorrect fluid is added     After adding the wrong fluid  contact your  service center     System defect    A Check Control message is displayed when  there is a system defect     Have the diesel exhaust fluid  replenished    The reducing agent is added by the service  center within the context of regular mainte   nance     It may be necessary to have the fluid replen   ished several times under particular circum   stances  for example  if the vehicle is driven in  a particularly sporty style or if it is driven at  high altitudes     The reducing agent must be replenished as  soon as the reserve display appears in the in   strument cluster to avoid not being able to re   start the engine     182    Diesel exhaust fluid at low  temperatures   Due to its physical properties  it is possible  that the reducing agent may also need to be  replenished between regular maintenance ap   pointments if it is exposed to temperatures un   der   23   F   5   C  In this case  add reducing  agent only immediately before starting to drive     The need to replenish it is indicated by the Re   serve display in the instrument cluster    At temperatures below   12   F   11   C the fill  level in some cases cannot be measured     After adding reducing agent  the reserve dis   play is displayed only until the fill level can be  meas
210. ngs    2   Speed    3   Warning    4  Press the controller     Setting your current speed as the limit  1   Settings   2   Speed     85    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Controls     Displays    3   Select current speed   4  Press the controller     The current vehicle speed is stored as the  limit     Settings on the Control  Display    Time    Setting the time zone   1   Settings    2   Time Date    3   Time zone    4  Select the desired time zone   The time zone is stored     Setting the time    1   Settings    2   Time Date    3   Time     4  Turn the controller until the desired hours    are displayed     2    Press the controller     6  Turnthe controller until the desired mi   nutes are displayed     7  Press the controller   The time is stored     Setting the time format    1   Settings   2   Time Date   3   Format      4  Select the desired format   The time format is stored     86    Automatic time setting    Depending on the equipment version  the time   date and  if necessary  the time zone are up   dated automatically     1   Settings   2   Time Date   3   Auto time set     Date    Setting the date    1   Settings    2   Time Date    3   Date     4  Turn the controller until the desired day is    displayed     on    Press the controller     6  Make the necessary settings for the month  and year     The date is stored     Setting the date format    1   Settings   2   Time Date   3   Format      4  Select the desired format   The date format
211. ning lamps  SPORT   is displayed in the instrument cluster     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Driving stability control systems   Controls        amp    The DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up   os Dynamic Traction Control is activated     SPORT    Consistently sporty tuning of the suspension  and engine control for greater driving agility  with maximum driving stabilization     The program can be configured to individual  specifications  The configuration is stored for  the remote control currently in use     Activating SPORT    M  Press button repeatedly until SPORT  is displayed in the instrument cluster     Configuring SPORT    When the display is activated on the Control  Display  refer to page 118  the SPORT driving  mode can be set to individual specifications      gt  Activating SPORT     gt   Configure SPORT     gt  Configuring the SPORT driving mode   SPORT can also be configured before it is acti   vated     Settings     Driving mode     Configure SPORT    4  Configure driving mode     le o    This configuration is retrieved when the  SPORT driving mode is activated     COMFORT    For a balanced tuning with maximum driving  stabilization     Activating COMFORT     i Press button repeatedly until COM   FORT is displayed in the instrument  cluster        In certain situations  the system automatically  changes to the NORMAL program  automatic  program change  refer to page 116     ECO PRO    ECO PRO  refer to page 169  provides consis   tent tuni
212. not use abrasive materials  otherwise  damage  can result  lt     Long term vehicle storage    When the vehicle is shut down for longer than  three months  special measures must be  taken  Additional information is available from  the service center     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Care   Mobility      225  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14       Online Edition for Part no  01 40    Reference    This chapter contains the technical data and an  index that will quickly take you to the information  you need        Reference   Technical data    Technical data    Vehicle equipment ment is also described that is not available in a  l vehicle  e  g   because of the selected optional  All standard  country specific and optional equipment or country variant  This also applies    equipment that is offered in the model seriesis for safety related functions and systems   described in this chapter  Therefore  equip     Dimensions  BMW 3 Series Limousine  Width with mirrors inches mm 79 9 2 031  Width without mirrors inches mm 71 3 1 811  Height inches mm 56 4 1 434  Length inches mm 182 2 4 627  Wheel base inches mm 110 6 2 810  Smallest turning circle diam  ft m 37 1 11 3  Smallest turning circle diameter with xDrive ft m 38 4 11 7  Weights  The values preceding the slash apply to vehi  lowing the slash apply to vehicles with auto   cles with manual transmission  the values fol  matic transmission   320i  Approved gross vehicle weight Ibs 4 300
213. ns  for example  that the number is dialed  when a phone number is selected     Displaying the button assignment    Use a finger to touch the buttons  Do not wear  gloves or use objects     The key assignment is displayed at the top  edge of the screen     Ss 3   03  4 Ge  Owner s Manual    Multimedia    Telephone  Navigation  ConnectedDrive  Vehicle Info  Settings        gt  To display short information  touch the  button      gt  To display detailed information  touch the  button for an extended period     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    iDrive   Ataglance     a glance    Deleting the button assignments    1  Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for  approx  five seconds     2   OK     Entering letters and numbers    General information    1  Turn the controller  select letters or num   bers     2  Select additional letters or numbers if  needed     3   OK   confirm the entry     Symbol Function    je Press the controller  delete the let   ter or number     l    Press the controller for an extended  period  delete all letters or numbers     Switching between cases  letters and  numbers    Depending on the menu  you can switch be     tween entering upper and lower case  letters  and numbers     Symbol Function   ABc Enter the letters    124  Enter the numbers   abc or ABC Mowe the controller up     Without navigation system    A    amp  Select the symbol     Entry comparison    Entry of names and addresses  the selection is  narrowed down every time a 
214. nt  Otherwise   there is risk of injury  e g   from rotating or hot  parts   lt     Fold down wiper arm       Before opening the hood  ensure that the  wiper arms are against the windshield  or this  may result in damage   lt     Opening the hood  1  Pull lever in the interior   Engine is released  arrow 1        2  After the lever is released  pull the lever  again     Hood can be opened  arrow 2     Indicator warning lamps    When the hood is opened  a Check Control  message is displayed     Closing the hood          Let the hood drop from a height of approx  16  in 40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully     The hood must audibly engage on both sides     Hood open when driving    If you see any signs that the hood is not  completely closed while driving  pull over im   mediately and close it securely   lt     Danger of pinching  Make sure that the closing path of the  hood is clear  otherwise  injuries may result  lt     197    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Mobility   Engine oil    Engine oil    Vehicle equipment    All standard  country specific and optional  equipment that is offered in the model series is  described in this chapter  Therefore  equip   ment is also described that is not available in a  vehicle  e  g   because of the selected optional  equipment or country variant  This also applies  for safety related functions and systems     General information    The engine oil consumption is dependent on  the driving style and driving cond
215. nt  passenger airbag    The strength with which the driver s and front  passenger airbags are triggered depends on  the position of the driver s and front passenger  seats     To maintain the accuracy of this function over  the long term  calibrate the front seats when a  corresponding message appears on the Con    trol Display     Calibrating the front seats   A corresponding message appears on the   Control Display    1  Move the respective seat forward all the  way    2  Move the respective seat forward again  It  moves forward briefly    3  Readjust the seat to the desired position     The calibration procedure is completed when  the message on the Control Display disap   pears     If the message continues to be displayed  re   peat the calibration     If the message does not disappear after a re   peat calibration  have the system checked as  soon as possible     Unobstructed area of movement       Ensure that the area of movement of the  seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injury  or damage to objects     Tire Pressure Monitor TPM    The concept    The system monitors tire pressure in the four  mounted tires  The system warns you if there  is a Significant loss of pressure in one or more  tires  For this purpose  sensors in the tire  valves measure the tire inflation pressure     Hints    Tire damage due to external factors  Sudden tire damage caused by external  influences cannot be indicated in advance     Pay attention to the other information and indi   cations 
216. nting points       Depending on the vehicle equipment  there are  two outer or three mounting points for child re   straint fixing systems with a tether strap     59    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Controls     Transporting children safely    Note 5  Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it    Mounting eyes Bonn    Only use the mounting eyes for the up  6  Lower and lock head restraints as needed     per retaining strap to secure child restraint fix   ing systems  otherwise  the mounting eyes    cud beda aged Locking the doors and    windows    Retaining strap guide  g Pg Rear doors  Retaining strap       Make sure that the upper retaining strap  is not routed over the head restraints or sharp  edges and is free of twisting on its way to the       g o   upper mounting point  otherwise  the belt can  iii   not properly secure the child restraint fixing     system in an accident  lt     xN  k gt     G       Push the locking lever on the rear doors down         The door can now be opened from the outside  only     Safety switch for the rear    r    A Press the button on the driver s door if    Rear window shelf  Seat backrest    1 Direction of travel children are being transported in the  2 Head restraint  ak   3 Hook for upper retaining strap This locks various functions so that they can   4 Mounting point eye not be operated from the rear  safety switch   5 refer to page 44    6   7    Upper retaining strap    Attaching the upper retaining strap to  
217. o  01 40 2 925 743   11 14       Mobility Care    Use only a mild soapy solution  with the safety  belts clipped into their buckles     Do not allow the reels to retract the safety  belts until they are dry     Carpets and floor mats    No objects in the area around the pedals       Keep floor mats  carpets  and any other  objects out of the area of motion of the pedals   otherwise  the function of the pedals could be  impeded while driving and create the risk of an  accident     Do not place additional floor mats over existing  mats or other objects     Only use floor mats that have been approved  for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in  place     Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas   tened again after they were removed for clean   ing  for example        Floor mats can be removed from the passen   ger compartment for cleaning     If the floor carpets are very dirty  clean with a  microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner   To prevent matting of the carpet  rub back and  forth in the direction of travel only     Sensors cameras    To clean sensors and cameras  use a cloth  moistened with a small amount of glass  cleaner     Displays screens    Clean the displays with an antistatic microfiber  cloth     Cleaning displays       Do not use chemical or household  cleansers     Keep all fluids and moisture away from the  unit     Otherwise  they could affect or damage surfa   ces or electrical components     224    Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do  
218. ofilter 143  146   Minimum tread  tires 193    Mirror 54   Mirror memory 53   Mobile communication devi   ces in the vehicle 163   Modifications  technical  refer  to Safety 7   Moisture in headlamp 205   Monitor  refer to Control Dis   play 16   Mounting of child restraint fix   ing systems 57   Multifunction steering wheel   buttons 12    N    Navigation  see user s manual  for Navigation  Entertain   ment and Communication   Neck restraints  front  refer to  Head restraints 51   Neck restraints  rear  refer to  Head restraints 52   Neutral cleaner  see wheel  cleaner 223   New wheels and tires 193   No Passing Information 81   Nylon rope for tow starting   towing 219    O    OBD Onboard Diagnosis 202   OBD  see OBD Onboard Di   agnosis 202   Obstacle marking  rearview  camera 132   Octane rating  refer to Rec   ommended fuel grade 180   Odometer 79   Office  see user s manual for  Navigation  Entertainment  and Communication   Oil 198   Oil  adding 199   Oil additives 199    Oil change 200   Oil change interval  service  requirements 80   Oil filler neck 199   Oil types  alternative 200   Oil types  approved 200   Old batteries  disposal 213   Onboard monitor  refer to  Control Display 16   Onboard vehicle tool kit 204   Opening closing via door  lock 37   Opening and closing 32   Opening and closing  without  remote control 37   Opening and closing  with re   mote control 35   Operating concept  iDrive 16   Optional equipment  standard  equipment 6   Outside air  refer to
219. oid placing excessive load on the  brake system  Light but consistent brake pres     sure can lead to high temperatures  brake wear    and possibly even brake failure   lt     164    Things to remember when driving    Do not drive in neutral    Do not drive in neutral or with the engine  stopped  as doing so disables engine braking   In addition  steering and brake assist are un   available with the engine stopped  lt     Brake disc corrosion   The corrosion on the brake discs and the con   tamination on the brake pads are furthered by    gt  Low mileage      gt  Extended periods when the vehicle is not  used at all      gt  Infrequent use of the brakes     Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure  that must be exerted by the pads during brake  applications to clean the discs is not reached     Should corrosion form on the brake discs  the  brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef   fect that generally cannot be corrected     Condensation under the parked  vehicle    When using the automatic climate control   condensation water develops that exits under   neath the vehicle     Traces of water under the vehicle like this are  normal     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14       Loading    Vehicle equipment    All standard  country specific and optional  equipment that is offered in the model series is  described in this chapter  Therefore  equip   ment is also described that is not available in a  vehicle  e  g   because of the selected optional  equip
220. olant is low  slowly add coolant up  to the specified level  do not overfill     4  Turn the cap until there is an audible click   The arrows on the coolant reservoir and  the cap must point towards one another     5  Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi   nated as soon as possible     Disposal    Comply with the relevant environmen   tal protection regulations when dispos   ing of coolant and coolant additives     201    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Mobility   Maintenance    Maintenance    Vehicle equipment    All standard  country specific and optional  equipment that is offered in the model series is  described in this chapter  Therefore  equip   ment is also described that is not available in a  vehicle  e  g   because of the selected optional  equipment or country variant  This also applies  for safety related functions and systems     BMW maintenance system    The maintenance system indicates required  maintenance measures  and thereby provides  support in maintaining road safety and the op   erational reliability of the vehicle     Condition Based Service  CBS    Sensors and special algorithms take into ac   count the driving conditions of your vehicle   Based on this  Condition Based Service deter   mines the maintenance requirements     The system makes it possible to adapt the  amount of maintenance you need to your user  profile     Detailed information on service requirements   refer to page 80  can be displayed on the Con   trol Disp
221. on    The vehicle is supplied with two remote con     trols with integrated keys  Press the button on the back of the remote    l control  arrow 1  and pull out the key  arrow 2   Every remote control contains a replaceable    battery  The integrated key fits the following locks     Depending on the equipment package and  gt  Driver s door     country specific variant  the functions of the  gt  Glove compartment on the front passenger  keys can be set  Settings  refer to page 41  side     For every remote control  personal settings are  stored in the vehicle  Personal Profile  refer to  page 33     The storage compartment contains a switch  for separately securing the trunk lid  refer to  page 38    Information on the required maintenance is  stored in the remote controls  Service data in  the remote control  refer to page 202     The front passenger glove compartment con   tains a switch for separately securing the trunk  lid  refer to page 38     Ata glance       1 Unlocking  2 Locking  32    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Opening and closing   Controls    Replacing the battery  gt  Interference of radio transmission by  charger while charging items such as mo   bile devices in the vehicle     A Check Control message is displayed if an at   tempt is made to switch on the ignition or start  the engine     Starting the engine with emergency  detection of the remote control       1  Take the integrated key out of the remote  control     2  Pushin the ca
222. on  Switch position  0  D   40    If the driver door is opened with the ignition  switched off  the exterior lighting is automati   cally switched off at these switch settings     Parking lamps  Switch position  D  d    the vehicle lamps light  up on all sides  e g   for parking     Do not use the parking lamps for extended pe   riods  otherwise  the vehicle battery may be   come discharged and it would then be impos   sible to start the engine     When parking  it is preferable to switch on the  one sided roadside parking lamps  refer to  page 90     Low beams    Switch position ZD with the ignition switched  on  the low beams light up     Welcome lamps    When the vehicle is parked  leave the switch in  position ZD or 40   parking and interior lamps  come on briefly when the vehicle is unlocked  depending on the ambient light     Activating deactivating  1   Settings    2   Lighting    3   Welcome lights     The setting is stored for the remote control  currently in use     Headlamp courtesy delay feature    The low beams stay lit for a short while if the  headlamp flasher is switched on after the igni   tion is switched off     Setting the duration  1   Settings   2   Lighting     89    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Controls     Lamps    3   Pathway lighting    4  Set the duration     The setting is stored for the remote control  currently in use     Automatic headlamp control    Switch position 2M   the low beams are  switched on and off automatic
223. on is activated  The interior rear   view mirror LED stays lit while the wireless sig   nal is being transmitted     Deleting stored functions    Press and hold the left and right button on the  interior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap   proximately 20 seconds until the LED flashes  rapidly  All stored functions are deleted  The  functions cannot be deleted individually     150    Digital compass    Ata glance       1 Control button  2 Mirror display    Mirror display    The point of the compass is displayed in the  mirror when driving straight     Operating concept    Various functions can be called up by pressing  the control button with a pointed object  such  as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object   The following setting options are displayed in  succession  depending on how long the con   trol button is pressed      gt  Pressed briefly  turns display on off     gt  3 to 6 seconds  compass zone setting    gt  6 to 9 seconds  compass calibration    gt     9 to 12 seconds  left right hand steering  setting      gt  12 to 15 seconds  language setting     Setting the compass zones    Sets the particular compass zones on the vehi   cle so that the compass operates correctly  re   fer to World map with compass zones     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14       World map with magnetic zones    Interior equipment          Procedure    1  Press and hold the control button for ap   prox  3 to 4 seconds  The number of the  set compass zone appears in 
224. on switch  refer to  Turn signals 65   Combination switch  refer to  Wiper system 66   Comfort Access 39   COMFORT program  Dy   namic Driving Control 117   Compartments in the  doors 157   Compass 150   Computer 83   Condensation on win   dows 146   Condensation under the vehi   cle 164   Condition Based Service  CBS 202   Configuring drive pro   gram 117   Confirmation signal 41   ConnectedDrive  see user s  manual for Navigation  En   tertainment and Communi   cation   ConnectedDrive Services   Connecting electrical devi   ces 152   Control Display 16   Control Display  settings 86   Controller 16  17    233    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Reference   Everything from A to Z    Control systems  driving sta   bility 114   Convenient opening 35   Coolant 201   Coolant temperature 78   Cooling function 142  145   Cooling  maximum 145   Cooling system 201   Corrosion on brake discs 164   Cruise control 125   Cruise control  active with  Stop  amp  Go 119   Cruising range 79   Cupholder 158   Current fuel consumption 80    D    Damage  tires 193   Damping control  dy   namic 115   Data  technical 228   Date 79   Daytime running lights 90   Defrosting  refer to defrosting  the windows 142   Defrosting  refer to Windows   defrosting 146   Defrosting the windows 142   Dehumidifying  air 142  145   Destination distance 84   Diesel exhaust fluid  at low  temperatures 182   Diesel exhaust fluid  having  refilled 182   Diesel exhaust fluid  on mini   mum 182  
225. on the equipment version  the list  in the instrument cluster can differ from the il   lustration     Activating a list and adjusting the  setting       d pa   On the right side of the steering wheel  turn  the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding  list    Using the thumbwheel  select the desired set   ting and confirm it by pressing the thumb   wheel     Computer    Indication in the info display    The information from the on   board computer is shown in the  info display in the instrument  cluster     83    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Displays       Calling up information on the info  display       Press the onboard computer button on the  turn signal lever     Information is displayed on the info display of  the instrument cluster     Information at a glance    Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn  signal lever calls up the following information  on the info display     Range    Average fuel consumption   Current fuel consumption   Average speed    Date    Speed limit detection     VV Vv VV VV    Time of arrival     When destination guidance is activated in  the navigation system      gt  Distance to destination     When destination guidance is activated in  the navigation system      gt  Arrow view of navigation system     When destination guidance is activated in  the navigation system     When the arrow view in the Head up Dis   play is inactive      gt  ECOPRO bonus range     84    Adjusting the info display   You can select what i
226. ontrol     ler to the right repeatedly until the   Options  menu is displayed   2   Display Owner s Manual     3  Select the desired page in the Owner s  Manual   OPTION     4  Press the button again to return to  the function displayed last     5  Press the button to return to the page  of the Owner s Manual displayed last     To switch back and forth repeatedly between  the function displayed last and the page of the  Owner s Manual displayed last  repeat steps 4  and 5  This opens a new panel every time     28  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Integrated Owner s Manual in the vehicle   Ataglance     a glance    29  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14                      Controls    This chapter is intended to provide you with  information that will give you complete control of  your vehicle  All features and accessories that  are useful for driving and your safety  comfort  and convenience are described here        Controls     Opening and closing    Opening and closing    Vehicle equipment 3 Opening the trunk lid   All standard  country specific and optional 4 Panic mode in alarm system  equipment that is offered in the model series is   described in this chapter  Therefore  equip  Integrated key    ment is also described that is not available in a  vehicle  e  g   because of the selected optional   equipment or country variant  This also applies  for safety related functions and systems     Remote control key       General informati
227. optional equipment or the country   specific variants    This also applies for safety related functions  and systems    For any options and equipment not described  in this Owner s Handbook  refer to the Supple   mentary Owner s Handbooks    On right hand drive vehicles  some control ele   ments are arranged differently than shown in  the illustrations     Status of the Owner s  Manual    Basic information    The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a  policy of constant development that is con   ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to  embody the highest quality and safety stan     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Notes __    dards  In rare cases  therefore  the features de   scribed in this Owner s Manual may differ from  those in your vehicle     Updates made after the editorial  deadline    Any updates made after the editorial deadline  for the Owner s Manuals are located in the ap   pendix of the printed quick reference for the  vehicle     For your own safety    Warranty    Your vehicle is technically configured for the  operating conditions and registration require   ments applying in the country of first delivery    homologation  If your vehicle is to be operated  in a different country it might be necessary to  adapt your vehicle to potentially differing oper   ating conditions and permit requirements  If  your vehicle does not comply with the homolo   gation requirements in a certain country you  cannot lodge warranty claims for your veh
228. or handle above the arm   rest or     gt  Pull the door opener twice individually on  each door  the first time unlocks the door   the second time opens it     37  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Controls     Opening and closing    Trunk lid Keep the closing path clear   Make sure that the closing path of the  Opening trunk lid is clear  otherwise  injuries may re   During opening  the trunk lid pivots back and sult   up     Do not place the remote control in the  Ensure that adequate clearance is available cargo area    before opening  Take the remote control with you and do not    leave it in the cargo area  otherwise  the re   mote control is locked inside the vehicle when  the trunk lid is closed     Opening from the outside    Locking separately    The trunk lid can be locked separately with the  switch in the front passenger glove compart   ment      gt  Trunk lid secured  arrow 1         gt  Trunk lid not secured  ar   row 2         gt  Press the button on the trunk lid     aA S A  Tt        Slide the switch into the arrow 1 position  This  secures the trunk lid and disconnects it from  the central locking system      gt  Press the button on the remote  control for approx  1 second     The trunk lid opens     Opening from the inside  p g If the glove compartment on the front passen     With the vehicle stationary  press the ger side is locked  the trunk lid cannot be  button in the driver s footwell  opened   The trunk lid opens  This is benefici
229. ore  always be alert and ready to inter   vene  otherwise  there is the danger of an acci   dent occurring     Curbs    The parking assistant may steer the vehi   cle over or onto curbs     Therefore  always be alert and ready to inter   vene  otherwise  the wheels  tires  or the vehi   cle may become damaged   lt     An engine that has been switched off by the  Auto Start Stop function is restarted automati   cally when the parking assistant is activated     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Driving comfort   Controls    Requirements Ultrasound sensors    For measuring parking spaces     gt  Maximum speed while driving forward ap   prox  22 mph 35 km h      gt  Maximum distance to row of parked vehi   cles  5 ft 1 5 m        Suitable parking space     gt  Gap between two objects with a minimum  length of approx  5 ft 1 5 m  The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking  spaces are located on the wheel arches         gt  Min  length of gap between two objects     your vehicle s length plus approx  To ensure full operability   4 ft 1 2 m   gt  Keep the sensors clean and free of ice    gt  Minimum depth  approx  5 ft 1 5 m   gt  When using high pressure washers  do not    spray the sensors for long periods and  For parking procedure maintain a distance of at least 12 in 30 cm    gt  Doors and trunk lid closed   gt  Donot paste over sensors    gt  Parking brake released    gt  When parking in parking spaces on the Switching on off  driver s side  the correspo
230. ose proximity to the re   gt  Changes to the settings are automatically  mote control  saved in the profile currently activated     33  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Controls     Opening and closing     gt  During unlocking  the profile stored for the  remote control is activated      gt  Your personal settings will be recognized  and called up again even if the vehicle has  been operated in the meantime with an   other remote control     Adjusting  The following settings are stored in a profile      gt  Radio  stored stations  station listened to  last      gt  Assignment of the programmable memory  buttons     Tone settings   Audio source listened to last      gt  Unlocking the vehicle  driver door or entire  vehicle      gt  Locking the vehicle  if no door is open or  after starting off     Welcome lamps  on off     gt  Triple turn signal activation  on off   Headlamp courtesy delay feature  time set   ting     gt  Language on the Control Display   Daytime running lights  on off      gt  Automatic climate control Automatic cli   mate control with enhanced features  set   tings     gt  Navigation  map views  route criteria  voice  output on off      gt  Park Distance Control PDC  adjusting the  signal tone volume      gt  Rearview camera  selection of functions  and type of display     Side view  display type     Head up Display  selection  brightness   position and rotation of the display     Driving Dynamics Control  sport program    gt  Exterior 
231. otherwise  there is the dan   ger of an accident occurring  lt     Detection range  The system s detection capabilities are limited     This may result in the warning not being is   sued or being issued late     For example  the following situations may not  be detected      gt  Slow moving vehicles when you approach  them at high speed      gt  Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of  you or sharply decelerating vehicles      gt  Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance   Two wheeled vehicles ahead of you    gt  Pedestrians     Functional limitations    The system may not be fully functional in the  following situations      gt  In heavy fog  rain  sprayed water or snow   fall     In tight curves     V    If the driving stability control systems are  limited or deactivated  for example  DSC  OFF      gt  Ifthe camera in the mirror or the radar sen   sor is dirty or obscured     gt  During calibration of the camera immedi   ately after vehicle shipment     gt  If there is constant dimming because of  oncoming light  for example  from the sun  low in the sky     105    01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Controls     Safety    Prewarning sensitivity    Depending on the set prewarning time  this  may result in increased false warnings     Collision warning with  braking function    The concept    The system issues a warning if there is immi   nent danger of a collision and also includes a  braking function     If the vehicle is equipped with Active Cruise  Control with Stop  amp  Go  
232. p at a suitable location  remove the tow  do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting  bar or rope  and switch off the hazard   Otherwise  damage to the tow fitting and the warning system    vehicle can occur  lt  6  Have the vehicle checked    Screw thread                 Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to  push it out     Tow starting    Automatic transmission  Do not tow start the vehicle     Due to the automatic transmission  the engine  cannot be started by tow starting     Have the cause of the starting difficulties rem   edied     Manual transmission    If possible  do not tow start the vehicle but  start the engine by jump starting  refer to  page 216  If the vehicle is equipped with a cat   alytic converter  only tow start while the en   gine is cold     1  Switch on the hazard warning system and  comply with local regulations    2  Ignition  refer to page 61  on    3  Engage third gear     4  Have the vehicle tow started with the  clutch pedal pressed and slowly release  the pedal  After the engine starts  immedi   ately press on the clutch pedal again     220  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Care   Mobility      Care    Vehicle equipment    All standard  country specific and optional  equipment that is offered in the model series is  described in this chapter  Therefore  equip   ment is also described that is not available in a  vehicle  e  g   because of the selected optional  equipment or country variant  This also applies  for sa
233. plays the current fuel con   sumption  You can check  whether you are currently driv     al ing in an efficient and environ     mentally friendly manner        Instrum  cluster with enhanced  features    Displays the current fuel con      sumption  You can check  whether you are currently driv   ing in an efficient and environ   mentally friendly manner        Displaying the current fuel  consumption    1   Settings   2   Instr  cluster display   3   Additional indicators     The bar display for the current fuel consump   tion is displayed in the instrument cluster     Energy recovery    Display    The kinetic energy of the vehicle  is converted to electrical energy  while coasting  The vehicle bat    tery is partially charged and fuel   consumption can be reduced        Service requirements    The concept    The driving distance or the time to the next  scheduled maintenance is displayed briefly in    80    the instrument cluster after the ignition is  switched on     The current service requirements can be read  out from the remote control by the service  specialist     Display   Data regarding the service status or legally  mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto   matically transmitted to your service center  before a service due date     Detailed information on service  requirements    More information on the scope of service re   quired can be displayed on the Control Dis     play    1   Vehicle Info    2   Vehicle status    3  Gol  Service required     Required ma
234. ply with  BMW s own stringent quality standards     California Proposition 65 Warning    California laws require us to state the following  warning    Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo   bile components and parts  including compo   nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi   cle  contain or emit chemicals known to the  State of California to cause cancer and birth  defects and reproductive harm  In addition   certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain  products of component wear contain or emit  chemicals known to the State of California to  cause cancer and birth defects or other repro   ductive harm  Battery posts  terminals and re   lated accessories contain lead and lead com   pounds  Wash your hands after handling  Used  engine oil contains chemicals that have caused  cancer in laboratory animals  Always protect  your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and  water     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    oo Notes    Service and warranty    We recommend that you read this publication  thoroughly  Your vehicle is covered by the fol   lowing warranties      gt  New Vehicle Limited Warranty    gt  Rust Perforation Limited Warranty      gt  Federal Emissions System Defect War   ranty      gt  Federal Emissions Performance Warranty      gt  California Emission Control System Lim   ited Warranty     Detailed information about these warranties is  listed in the Service and Warranty Information  Booklet for US models or in the Warranty a
235. pment that is offered in the model series is  described in this chapter  Therefore  equip     ment is also described that is not available in a   vehicle  e  g   because of the selected optional   equipment or country variant  This also applies  for safety related functions and systems        1 Front airbag  driver  2 Front airbag  front passenger  3 Head airbag    Front airbags    Front airbags help protect the driver and front  passenger by responding to frontal impacts in  which safety belts alone cannot provide ade   quate restraint     Side airbags    In a lateral impact  the side airbag supports the  side of the body in the chest and lap area     94    4 Side airbag  5 Knee airbags    Head airbags    In a lateral impact  the head airbag supports  the head     Knee airbag    The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal  impact     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Safety   Controls    Protective action    Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa   tion  e g   in less severe accidents or rear end  collisions     Information on how to ensure the optimal  protective effect of the airbags     gt  Keep at a distance from the airbags      gt  Always grasp the steering wheel on the  steering wheel rim  holding your hands at  the 3 o clock and 9 o clock positions  to  keep the danger of injury to your hands or  arms as low as possible if the airbag is trig   gered      gt  There should be no people  animals  or ob   jects between an airbag and a per
236. pressure on the accelerator pedal  After  the rocker switch is released  the vehicle  maintains its final speed  Pressing the  switch beyond the resistance point causes  the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly     Resuming the desired speed    Press the button     The stored speed is reached and maintained   Displays in the instrument cluster    Indicator lamp      Depending on how the vehicle is equip   ped  the indicator lamp in the instru   ment cluster indicates whether the sys   tem is switched on     Desired speed     gt  The marking lights up green   the system is active      gt  The marking lights up or   ange  the system has been  interrupted     127    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Controls   Driving comfort     gt  The marking does not light up  the system  is switched off     Brief status display      Selected desired speed     If     appears briefly on the display for Check  Control messages  it is possible that the sys   tem requirements for operation are currently  not met     PDC Park Distance Control    The concept    PDC support when parking  Slowly approach   ing an object behind or  with the appropriate  PDC equipment  also in front of your vehicle is  signaled by      gt  Signal tones    gt  Visual display     General information    Measurements are made by ultrasound sen   sors in the bumpers     The range  depending on the obstacle and en   vironmental conditions  is approx  6 ft 2 m     An acoustic warning is first given      gt
237. r is combined with the low tire pressure  telltale  When the system detects a malfunc   tion  the telltale will flash for approximately one  minute and then remain continuously illumi   nated  This sequence will continue upon sub   sequent vehicle start ups as long as the mal   function exists  When the malfunction indicator  is illuminated  the system may not be able to  detect or signal low tire pressure as intended   TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of  reasons  including the installation of replace   ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle  that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop   erly  Always check the TPMS malfunction tell   tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels  on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement  or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS  to continue to function properly     FTM Flat Tire Monitor    The concept    The system detects a pressure loss on the ba   sis of speed differences between the individual  wheels while driving     In the event of a pressure loss  the diameter  and therefore the rotational speed of the corre   sponding wheel change  This is detected and  reported as a flat tire     The system does not measure the actual infla   tion pressure in the tires     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Safety   Controls    Functional requirements    The system must have been initialized when  the tire inflation pressure was correct  other   wise  reliable signaling of a flat tire is not en   
238. r may be re   duced automatically to save battery power     AUTO program    AUTO Press the button     Air flow  air distribution  and tempera   ture are controlled automatically     Depending on the selected temperature and  outside influences  the air is directed to the  windshield  side windows  upper body  and  into the footwell     142    The cooling function  refer to page 142  is  switched on automatically with the AUTO pro   gram     Temperature    Turn the wheel to set the de   sired temperature        A  A    S       The automatic climate control reaches this  temperature as quickly as possible  if neces   sary by increasing the cooling or heating out   put  and then keeps it constant     Avoid rapidly switching between different tem   perature settings  Otherwise  the automatic cli   mate control will not have sufficient time to ad   just the set temperature     Cooling function    The passenger compartment can only be  cooled with the engine running     AIC Press the button        The air is cooled and dehumidified  and  depending on the temperature setting   warmed again     Depending on the weather  the windshield may  fog up briefly when the engine is started     The cooling function is switched on automati   cally with the AUTO program     When using the automatic climate control   condensation water  refer to page 164  devel   ops that exits underneath the vehicle     Recirculated air mode    You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu   tants in the immediat
239. re    than 1 25 miles 2 km or when the vehicle has  been parked for at least 2 hours     The displays of inflation devices may under   read by up to O 1bar  2 psi     For Flat Tire Monitor  after correcting the tire  inflation pressure  reinitialize the Flat Tire  Monitor     For Tire Pressure Monitor  after correcting the  tire inflation pressure  reset the Tire Pressure  Monitor     Pressure specifications    The tire inflation pressure table  refer to   page 186  contains all pressure specifications  for the specified tire sizes at the ambient tem   perature  Pressure specifications apply to ap   proved tire sizes and recommended tire  brands  This information can be obtained from  your service center     To identify the correct tire inflation pressure   please note the following      gt  Tire sizes of your vehicle    gt  Maximum permitted driving speed     Tire inflation pressures up to  100 mph 160 km h    For speeds of up to 100 mph 160 km h and for  optimum driving comfort  note the pressure  values in the tire inflation pressure table  refer  to page 186  and adjust as necessary     185    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14       Mobility Wheels and tires            These pressure values can also be found on  the tire inflation pressure label on the driver s  door pillar     Maximum permissible speed    Do not exceed 100 mph 160 km h  other   wise  tire damage and accidents may result  lt     Tire inflation pressure values up to  100 mph 160 km h    3
240. re products 222   Care  displays 224   Care  vehicle 222   Cargo 165   Cargo area  enlarging 154   Cargo area  storage compart   ments 159   Cargo  securing 166    Cargo straps  securing  cargo 166   Car key  refer to Remote con   trol 32   Carpet  care 224   Car wash 221   Catalytic converter  refer to  Hot exhaust system 163   CBS Condition Based Serv   ice 202   CD Multimedia  see user s  manual for Navigation  En   tertainment and Communi   cation   Center armrest 157   Center console 14   Central locking system 37   Central screen  refer to Con   trol Display 16   Changes  technical  refer to  Safety 7   Changing parts 204   Changing wheels 212   Changing wheels tires 193   Check Control 76   Checking the oil level elec   tronically 198   Children  seating position 57   Children  transporting  safely 57   Child restraint fixing sys   tem 57   Child restraint fixing system  LATCH 58   Child restraint fixing systems   mounting 57   Child safety locks 60   Child seat  mounting 57   Child seats 57   Chrome parts  care 223   Cigarette lighter 152   Cleaning  displays 224   Climate control 141  144   Clock 79   Closing opening via door  lock 37    Closing opening with remote  control 35   Clothes hooks 158   Coasting 172   Coasting with engine decou   pled  coasting 172   Coasting with idling en   gine 172   Cockpit 12   Cold starting  refer to Starting  the engine 62   Collision warning with braking  function 106   Collision warning with City  Braking function 103   Combinati
241. re to  remain drivable to a restricted degree in the  event of a pressure loss     F TM  continued driving with a damaged tire   refer to page 102     TPM  continued driving with a damaged tire   refer to page 99     Changing run flat tires    For your own safety  only use run flat tires  No  spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire   Your service center will be glad to advise you     Snow chains    Fine link snow chains    Only certain types of fine link snow chains  have been tested by the manufacturer of the  vehicle  classified as road safe and approved     Information about the approved snow chains  are available from the service center     Use    Use only in pairs on the rear wheels  equipped  with the tires of the following size      gt  205 60 R 16    gt  225 55 R 16    gt  225 50R 17    gt  225 45 R 18   Follow the chain manufacturer s instructions     Make sure that the snow chains are always  sufficiently tight  Retighten as needed accord   ing to the chain manufacturer s instructions     Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after  mounting snow chains  as doing so may result  in incorrect readings     Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after  mounting snow chains  as doing so may result  in incorrect readings     When driving with snow chains  briefly activate  Dynamic Traction Control if necessary     Maximum speed with snow chains    Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph 50 km h  when using snow chains     195    Online Edition for Part no  01 40
242. related functions and systems     Onboard vehicle tool kit       The onboard vehicle tool kit is located on the  right side in the cargo area in a storage com   partment  Open the cover     Wiper blade replacement    Note    Do not fold down the wipers without  wiper blades    Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades  have not been installed  this may damage the  windshield     Replacing the wiper blades    1  To change the wiper blades  fold up  refer  to page 68  the wiper arms     2  Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly     204    3  Squeeze the retainer spring  arrow 1  and  fold up the wiper blade  arrow 2        4  Remove the wiper blade forward from the  catch     5  Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order  of removal until it locks in place     6  Fold down the wipers   Folding down wipers before opening the  hood    Before opening the hood  ensure that the  wiper arms with the wiper blades are against  the windshield to prevent damage  lt     Lamp and bulb replacement  Hints    Lamps and bulbs    Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu   tion to vehicle safety     The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends  that you entrust corresponding procedures to  the service center if you are unfamiliar with  them or they are not described here     You can obtain a selection of replacement  bulbs at the service center     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Replacing components   Mobility    Danger of burns       Only change bulbs when they are coo
243. rking posi   tion  wait for the automatic steering wheel  movement after the gear change when the  vehicle is stationary     The end of the parking procedure is indi   cated on the Control Display     3  Adjust the parking position yourself if nec   essary     Interrupting manually   The parking assistant can be interrupted at any  time     gt    amp   Parking Assistant     gt  DN Press the button     Interrupting automatically    The system is interrupted automatically in the  following situations      gt  Ifthe driver grasps the steering wheel or if  he takes over steering      gt  Ifa gear is selected that does not match  the instruction on the Control Display      gt  If the vehicle speed exceeds approx   6 mph 10 km h      gt  Onsnow covered or slippery road surfaces  if necessary      gt  Ifthe Park Distance Control PDC displays  clearances that are too small      gt  Ifa maximum number of parking attempts  or the time taken for parking is exceeded      gt  When switching to another function on the  Control Display     A Check Control message is displayed     Resume    An interrupted parking procedure can be con   tinued if necessary     Follow the instructions on the Control Display  to do this     System limits    No parking assistance    The parking assistant does not offer assis   tance in the following situations      gt  In tight curves     Functional limitations    The system may not be fully functional in the  following situations      gt  On bumpy road surfaces
244. rol  currently in use     Adjusting the height  1   Settings    2   Head Up Display   3   Height    4  Turn the controller     The setting is stored for the remote control  currently in use     Setting the rotation  1   Settings   2   Head Up Display     88    3   Rotation   4  Turn the controller     The setting is stored for the remote control  currently in use     Special windshield  The windshield is part of the system     The shape of the windshield makes it possible  to display a precise image    A film in the windshield prevents double im   ages from being displayed    Therefore  have the special windshield re   placed by a service center only     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Lamps   Controls    Lamps    Vehicle equipment    All standard  country specific and optional  equipment that is offered in the model series is  described in this chapter  Therefore  equip   ment is also described that is not available in a  vehicle  e  g   because of the selected optional  equipment or country variant  This also applies  for safety related functions and systems     Ata glance       1 Rear fog lamps  2 Front fog lamps    3 Automatic headlamp control  Adaptive  Light Control  High beam Assistant  Wel   come lamps  Daytime running lights    4 Lamps off  daytime running lights  5 Parking lamps  daytime running lights    6 Low beams  welcome lamps  High beam  Assistant    7 Instrument lighting    Parking lamps low beams   headlamp control    General informati
245. rol 141  Controller with buttons 16    14    9    PA    11    Parking brake 65   PDC Park Distance Control 128  Rearview camera 130   Parking assistant 136   Surround View 130    Driving Dynamics Control 116    SPORT  A    v  ECO PRO       or    DSC Dynamic Stability Con   trol 114    12 Automatic transmission selector    lever 69  Manual transmission selector lever 69    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Cockpit  EEIE          All around the headliner    TE          1 Intelligent Emergency Re  4 Reading lamps 92  RA  quest 215 N   2  Glass sunroof  powered 45 5 Interior lamps 92   3    Indicator lamp  front passenger    arc   airbag 96    15    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14       Ataglance GEIG  iDrive    iDrive    Vehicle equipment    All standard  country specific and optional  equipment that is offered in the model series is  described in this chapter  Therefore  equip   ment is also described that is not available in a  vehicle  e  g   because of the selected optional  equipment or country variant  This also applies  for safety related functions and systems     The concept    The iDrive combines the functions of a multi   tude of switches  Thus  these functions can be  operated from a central location     Using the iDrive during a trip       To avoid becoming distracted and pos   ing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle s  occupants and to other road users  never at   tempt to use the controls or enter information  unless traff
246. ror settings    The driver s seat and exterior mirror positions  used last are stored for the remote control cur   rently in use     When the vehicle is unlocked  these positions  are automatically retrieved if this function was  activated    Pinch hazard when moving back the seat    If this function is used  first make sure  that the footwell behind the driver s seat is  empty  Otherwise  people can be injured or ob   jects damaged when the seat is moved back   The adjustment procedure is interrupted    gt  When a seat position switch is pressed      gt  When a button of the seat and mirror mem   ory is pressed     Activating the setting   1   Settings    2   Doors key    3   Last seat position autom      Alarm system    The concept   The vehicle alarm system responds to     gt  Opening of a door  the hood or the trunk  lid     gt  Movements in the vehicle     Changes in the vehicle tilt  e g   during at   tempts to steal a wheel or when towing the  Car      gt  Interruptions in battery voltage     41    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Controls     Opening and closing    The alarm system briefly indicates tampering    gt  By sounding an acoustic alarm      gt  By switching on the hazard warning sys   tem      gt  By flashing the daytime running lights     Arming and disarming the alarm  system    General information    When you lock or unlock the vehicle  either  with the remote control or via the Comfort Ac   cess at the door lock  the alarm system is
247. rpose     134    General information    The image is captured by two cameras  integrated in the exterior mirrors and by the  backup camera     The range is at least 7 ft 2 m to the side and  rear     In this way  obstacles up to the height of the  exterior mirrors are detected early     Notes    Check the traffic situation as well    Check the traffic situation around the ve   hicle with your own eyes  Otherwise  an acci   dent could result from road users or objects lo   cated outside the picture area of the  cameras     Ata glance    Button in the vehicle       Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Driving comfort   Controls    Cameras       The lenses of the Top View cameras are lo   cated at the bottom of the exterior mirror hous   ings  The image quality may be impaired by  dirt     Clean the lens  refer to page 224     Switching on off    Switching on automatically    With the engine running  engage selector lever  position R     The Top View and PDC images are displayed if  the system is switched on via iDrive     Automatic deactivation during forward  travel    The system switches off when a certain driving  distance or speed is exceeded     Switch the system back on if necessary     Switching on off manually    Py  Press the button      gt  On  the LED lights up    gt  Off  the LED goes out   Top View is displayed     Display    Visual warning    The approach of the vehicle to an object can  be shown on the Control Display     When the distance to an
248. s  care 224   Service and warranty 8   Service requirements  Condi   tion Based Service  CBS 202   Service requirements  dis   play 80   Service  Roadside Assis   tance 216   Services  ConnectedDrive   Settings  locking unlock   ing 41   Settings on Control Dis   play 86   Settings  storing for seat  mir   ror 53    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Everything from A to Z   Reference        Shifting  automatic transmis   sion 69   Shifting  manual transmis   sion 69   Shift paddles on steering  wheel 71   Side airbags 94   Side View 133   Signaling  horn 12   Signals when unlocking 41   Sitting safely 47   Size 228   Slide tilt glass roof 45   Smallest turning circle 228   Snow chains 195   Socket 152   Socket  OBD Onboard Diag   nostics 202   Soot particulate filter 163   SOS button 215   Spare fuse 213   Specified engine oil  types 200   Speed  average 84   Speed limit detection  on   board computer 85   Speed limiter  display 81   Speed Limit Information 81   Speed warning 85   Split screen 22   SPORT    program  Dynamic  Driving Control 116   Sport automatic transmis   sion 71   Sport displays  torque dis   play  performance dis   play 85   SPORT program  Dynamic  Driving Control 117   Sport program  transmis   sion 71   Sport steering  variable 116   Stability control systems 114   Start stop  automatic func   tion 63   Start Stop button 61    Start function during malfunc   tion 33  Starting the engine 62  Status control display   tires 97  Status i
249. s offered in the model series is  described in this chapter  Therefore  equip   ment is also described that is not available in a  vehicle  e  g   because of the selected optional  equipment or country variant  This also applies  for safety related functions and systems        Hints 3  Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached    Refuel promptly to the fuel filler flap     Refuel no later than at a range of  30 miles 50 km  or operation of the engine is  not ensured and damage may occur     Diesel engines    The filler neck is designed for refueling at die   sel fuel pumps        Fuel cap Closing    1  Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you  clearly hear a click     Opening  1  Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler  flap     2  Close the fuel filler flap     Do not pinch the retaining strap       Do not pinch the retaining strap attached  to the cap  otherwise  the cap cannot be  closed properly and fuel vapors can escape     Manually unlocking fuel filler flap    In the event of an electrical malfunction  for ex   ample        178  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Refueling   Mobility      1  Open the cover on the right side trim  To  do this  turn the cap        2  Pull the green knob with the fuel pump  symbol  This releases the fuel filler flap        Observe the following when  refueling  The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks  off the first time    Do not overfill the fuel tank    Do not overfill the fuel tank  otherwise
250. sed      gt  Brief wipe  press down once      gt  To switch off normal wipe  press down  once      gt  To switch off fast wipe  press down twice            Intermittent operation or rain sensor    The concept    Without the rain sensor  the frequency of the  wiper operation is preset     The rain sensor automatically controls the time  between wipes depending on the intensity of  the rainfall  The sensor is located on the wind   shield  directly behind the interior rearview mir   ror     Activating deactivating    Press the button on the wiper lever     The LED in the wiper lever lights up and a wip   ing operation is started  If there is frost  wiper  operation is not started     Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes    Deactivate the rain sensor when passing  through an automatic car wash  otherwise   damage could be caused by undesired wiper  activation        67    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Driving       Setting the frequency or sensitivity of  the rain sensor        Turn the thumbwheel     Clean the windshield  headlamps    Pull the wiper lever     The system sprays washer fluid on the wind   shield and activates the wipers briefly     In addition  the headlamps are cleaned at regu   lar intervals when the vehicle lights are  switched on     Do not use the washer system at freezing  temperatures    Do not use the washers if there is any danger  that the fluid will freeze on the windshield  oth   erwise  your vision could be obscured  For t
251. sible     Intensity of the AUTO program    With the AUTO program switched on  auto   matic control of the air flow and air distribution  can be adjusted      amp    Press the left or right side of the but     ton  decrease or increase the inten   sity     The selected intensity is shown on the display  of the automatic climate control     Maximum cooling    Ewan Press the button   AIC    The system is set to the lowest tem     perature  maximum air flow and air circulation  mode     Air flows out of the vents for the upper body  region  The vents need to be open for this     The function is available above an external  temperature of approx  32   F O   C and with the  engine running     The air flow can be adjusted when the program  is active     Cooling function    The passenger compartment can only be  cooled with the engine running     Press the button        The air is cooled and dehumidified and  de   pending on the temperature setting  warmed  again     Depending on the weather  the windshield may  fog up briefly when the engine is started     The cooling function is switched on automati   cally with the AUTO program     When using the automatic climate control   condensation water  refer to page 164  devel   ops that exits underneath the vehicle     Automatic recirculated air control   recirculated air mode    You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu   tants in the immediate environment by tempo   rarily suspending the supply of outside air  The  system then recirc
252. sing the button    p                  Press the button      gt  LED comes on  Auto Start Stop function is  deactivated     The engine is started during an automatic  engine stop     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Driving   Controls    Releasing    The engine can only be stopped or started  via the Start Stop button      gt  LED goes out  Auto Start Stop function is  activated     Switching off the vehicle during an  automatic engine stop    During an automatic engine stop  the vehicle  can be switched off permanently  e g   when  leaving it     1  Press the Start Stop button  The ignition is  switched off  The Auto Start Stop function  is deactivated     Selector lever position P is engaged auto   matically     2  Set the parking brake   Engine start as usual via Start Stop button     Automatic deactivation    In certain situations  the Auto Start Stop func   tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea   sons  such as when the driver is detected to be  absent     Malfunction    The Auto Start Stop function no longer  switches of the engine automatically  A Check  Control message is displayed  It is possible to  continue driving  Have the system checked     Parking brake  Applying    The lever automatically engages after being  pulled up     The indicator lamp lights up red  The  BRAKE  parking brake is set     Lower lamp  indicator lamp in Canadian  models       Raise lever slightly  press the button and guide  the lever down     Hints    Use whil
253. son      gt  Donotuse the cover of the front airbag on  the front passenger side as a storage area      gt  Keep the dashboard and window on the  front passenger side clear  i e  do not cover  with adhesive labels or coverings  and do  not attach holders such as for navigation  instruments and mobile phones      gt  Make sure that the front passenger is sit   ting correctly  i e   keeps his or her feet and  legs in the footwell  otherwise  leg injuries  can occur if the front airbag is triggered      gt  Donot place slip covers  seat cushions or  other objects on the front passenger seat  that are not approved specifically for seats  with integrated side airbags      gt  Do not hang pieces of clothing  such as  jackets  over the backrests      gt  Make sure that occupants keep their heads  away from the side airbag and do not rest  against the head airbag  otherwise  injuries  can occur if the airbags are triggered     Do not remove the airbag restraint system    gt  Donotremove the steering wheel     Do not apply adhesive materials to the air   bag cover panels  cover them or modify  them in any way      gt  Never modify either the individual compo   nents or the wiring in the airbag system   This also applies to steering wheel covers   the dashboard  the seats  the roof pillars  and the sides of the headliner     Even when all instructions are followed closely   injury from contact with the airbags cannot be  ruled out in certain situations     The ignition and inflation no
254. ss  With the rearview camera switched on     1     Select the symbol     2  Turn the controller until the desired setting  is reached  and press the controller     Contrast  With the rearview camera switched on     1     Select the symbol     2  Turn the controller until the desired setting  is reached  and press the controller     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Driving comfort       System limits    Detection of objects    Very low obstacles as well as high  protruding  objects such as ledges may not be detected by  the system     Assistance functions also take into account  data of the PDC     Follow instructions in the PDC chapter  refer to  page 128     The objects displayed in the Control Display  under certain circumstances are closer than  they appear  Therefore  do not estimate the   distance from the objects on the display     Side View    The concept    Side View provides an early look at cross traffic  at blind driveways and intersections  Road  users concealed by obstacles to the left and  right of the vehicle can only be detected rela   tively late from the driver s seat  To improve  visibility  two cameras in the front of the vehi   cle record the traffic situation on each side     Notes    The images from both cameras are shown si   multaneously on the Control Display     Check the traffic situation as well    Check the traffic situation around the ve   hicle on blind driveways and intersections with  your own eyes  Otherwise  an acciden
255. structed   otherwise  people can be injured or objects  damaged   lt     53    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Controls     Adjusting    General information 2  Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2  until the adjustment procedure is com   pleted     Calling up of a seat position  deactivated   After a brief period  the calling up of stored  seat positions is deactivated to save battery  power        To reactivate calling up of a seat position     Two different driver s seat and exterior mirror  gt  Open and close the door or trunk lid   positions can be stored and retrieved for each  gt  Press a button on the remote control   remote control  Settings for the backrest width       gt  Press the Start Stop button   and lumbar support are not stored in memory     Storing    Mirror  1  Switch on the ignition       2  Set the desired position  Exterior mirrors    d  Press the button  The LED in the At a glance  button lights up     4  Press the desired button 1 or 2  The LED  goes out     If the M button is pressed accidentally   Press the button again   The LED goes out        Calling up settings    1 Adjusting  2 Left right  Automatic Curb Monitor  3 Fold in and out    Comfort function  1  Open the driver s door   2  Switch off the ignition     3  Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2  General information    The mirror on the passenger side is more  curved than the driver s side mirror     The corresponding seat position is performed  automatically    
256. sured  Initialize the system after each correc   tion of the tire inflation pressure and after  every tire or wheel change     Status display   The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can  be displayed on the Control Display  e g    whether or not the FTM is active    1   Vehicle Info    2   Vehicle status    3   2   Flat Tire Monitor  FTM     The status is displayed     Initialization    The initialization process adopts the set infla   tion tire pressures as reference values for the  detection of a flat tire  Initialization is started by  confirming the inflation pressures     Do not initialize the system when driving with   snow Chains    1   Vehicle Info    2   Vehicle status    3   i  Perform reset    4  Start the engine   do not drive away    5  Start the initialization with  Perform reset    Drive away     The initialization is completed while driving   which can be interrupted at any time     The initialization automatically continues when  driving resumes     Indication of a flat tire     1     The yellow warning lamp lights up  A  Check Control message is displayed     There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation  pressure     1  Reduce your speed and stop cautiously   Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu   vers     2  Check whether the vehicle is fitted with  regular tires or run flat tires     Run flat tires  refer to page 195  are la   beled with a circular symbol containing the  letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall     Do not continue driving
257. switched off     When the ignition is switched off  by opening  or closing the driver s door or unbuckling the    61    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Controls     Driving    driver s seat belt  the radio ready state remains  active     Radio ready state  Activate radio ready state      gt  When the engine is running  press the  Start Stop button     Some electronic systems power consumers  remain ready for operation     The radio ready state switches off automati   cally      gt  After approx  8 minutes      gt  When the vehicle is locked using the cen   tral locking system      gt  Shortly before the battery is discharged  completely  so that the engine can still be  started     Starting the engine    Hints    Enclosed areas    Do not let the engine run in enclosed  areas  since breathing in exhaust fumes may  lead to loss of consciousness and death  The  exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide  an  odorless and colorless  but highly toxic gas  lt     Unattended vehicle    Do not leave the vehicle unattended with  the engine running  doing so poses a risk of  danger     Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run   ning  set the parking brake and place the trans   mission in selector lever position P or neutral  to prevent the vehicle from moving   lt     Repeated starting in quick Succession    Avoid repeated unsuccessful attempts to  start the vehicle or starting the vehicle several  times in quick succession  Otherwise  the fuel  is not burned or
258. t     Before driving into a car wash    In order for the vehicle to be able to roll into a  car wash  pay attention to the information re   garding Washing in automatic car washes  re   fer to page 221     Automatic transmission    Switching off the engine    1  Engage selector lever position P with the  vehicle stopped     2  Press the Start Stop button    The engine is switched off    The radio ready state is switched on   3  Set the parking brake     Manual transmission    Switching off the engine   1  With the vehicle at a standstill  press the  Start Stop button    2  Shift into first gear or reverse    3  Set the parking brake     Auto Start Stop function    The concept    The Auto Start Stop function helps save fuel   The system switches off the engine during a  stop  e g   in traffic congestion or at traffic  lights  The ignition remains switched on  The  engine starts again automatically for driving  off     Automatic mode    After every start of the engine using the Start   Stop button  the Auto Start Stop function is in  the last selected state  refer to page 64   When the Auto Start Stop function is active  it  is available when the vehicle is traveling faster  than about 3 mph  approx  5 km h     Engine stop   The engine is switched off automatically dur    ing a stop under the following conditions    Automatic transmission     gt  The selector lever is in selector lever posi   tion D     gt  Brake pedal remains depressed while the  vehicle is stopped     gt  The
259. t available in a  vehicle  e  g   because of the selected optional  equipment or country variant  This also applies  for safety related functions and systems     Sitting safely   The ideal seating position can make a vital  contribution to relaxed  fatigue free driving   The seating position plays an important role in  an accident in combination with     gt  Safety belts  refer to page 50     gt  Head restraints  refer to page 51     gt  Airbags  refer to page 94     Seats    Hints    Do not adjust the seat while driving    Do not adjust the driver s seat while driv   ing  or the seat could respond with unexpected  movement and the ensuing loss of vehicle  control could lead to an accident  lt     Do not incline the backrest too far to the  rear    Also on the front passenger side  do not incline  the backrest on the front passenger side too  far to the rear during driving  or there is a risk of  slipping under the safety belt in the event of an  accident  This would eliminate the protection  normally provided by the belt     Manually adjustable seats    At a glance       Forward backward  Thigh support  Seat tilt   Backrest width  Lumbar support  Height   Backrest tilt    1  2  3  4  5  6  7    Forward backward       A T am  Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired    direction     After releasing the lever  move the seat for   ward or back slightly to make sure it engages    properly     47    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Controls     Adjus
260. t could  result from road users or objects located out   side the picture area of the Side View cam   eras     Ata glance    Button in the vehicle       oo Side View    Cameras       Two cameras integrated in the bumpers cap   ture the image     The two camera lenses are located on the  sides of the bumper     The image quality may be impaired by dirt   Clean the lens  refer to page 224     Switching on off    Switching on off manually    oo Press the button     Automatic deactivation during forward  travel    The system switches off when a certain driving  distance or speed is exceeded     133    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14       Controls     Driving comfort    Switch the system back on if necessary     Display  The traffic area to the left and right is displayed  on the Control Display        Guidelines at the bottom of the image show  the position of the front of the vehicle     Brightness  With the Side View switched on   1      Brightness     2  Turn the controller until the desired setting  is reached  and press the controller     Contrast  With the Side View switched on     1      Contrast     2  Turn the controller until the desired setting  is reached  and press the controller     System limits    The cameras capture a maximum range of  330 ft 100 m     Top View    The concept   Top View provides assistance in parking and  maneuvering  The area around the doors and  the road area around the vehicle are shown on  the Control Display for this pu
261. t in the need for unscheduled main   tenance   lt     Diesel    Low Sulfur Diesel    The engine of your BMW is designed for diesel  with low sulfur content     Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel ASTM D 975 xx     xx  comply with the current standard in each  case     Use only Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel        The fraction of biodiesel in the fuel must  not exceed 5    referred to as B5  Do not use  gasoline  If you do fill the tank with the wrong  fuel  e g   gasoline  do not start the engine as  this may damage the engine   lt     After adding the wrong fuel  contact your serv   ice center or roadside assistance     If the fuel pump nozzle does not fit in the filler  pipe of your BMW  please check to ensure that  you are refueling at a diesel fuel pump that is  equipped with a diesel fuel pump nozzle     In the event the Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel fuel  cannot be fully inserted into the fuel filler neck   please contact BMW Roadside Assistance for  instructions on how to add fuel  For more infor   mation on BMW Roadside Assistance  refer to  page 216     Winter diesel    To ensure that the diesel engine remains op   erational in the winter  use winter diesel     It is available at gas stations during winter  months     The fuel filter heating system  included as a  standard feature  prevents disruption of the  fuel supply while driving     Do not add any diesel additives    Do not add additives  including gasoline   otherwise  engine damage may occur  lt        bp  BMW recommends BP fuels   
262. tch with the key  arrow 1     3  Remove the cover of the battery compart   ment  arrow 2        4  Insert a battery of the same type with the  positive side facing upwards     5  Press the cover closed  Automatic transmission  if a corresponding  CRY Take the used battery to a recycling Check Control message appears  hold the re   center or to your service center  mote control  as shown  against the marked    area on the steering column and press the  Start Stop button within 10 seconds while    New remote controls pressing the brake    New remote controls are available from the Manual transmission  if a corresponding Check   service center  Control message appears  hold the remote  control  as shown  against the marked area on   Loss of the remote controls the steering column and press the Start Stop   Lost remote controls can be blocked by your button within 10 seconds while pressing the   service center  clutch pedal     Emergency detection of remote    control Personal Profile   It is possible to switch on the ignition or start   the engine in situations such as the following  The concept    gt  Interference of radio transmission to re  Individual settings in the vehicle are saved in  mote control by external sources  e g  by personal profiles  Every remote control is as   radio masts  signed a profile   Discharged battery in the remote control  Three personal profiles and a guest profile can    gt  Interference of radio transmission by mo  be created   bile devices in cl
263. the bulb gently into the socket  turn  counterclockwise and remove     3  Install the new bulb and bulb holder in re   verse order of removal     4  Attach the cover to the wheel house     6  Close the headlamp housing with the cap   Make sure that the cap engages     7  Attach the cover to the wheel house     206  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Replacing components   Mobility      Accessing the daytime running lights  high High beams headlamp flasher  beams headlamp flasher and parking 55 watt bulb  H7   lamps    1  Tilt the bulb down and then up to loosen it  from the holder and remove     Follow general instructions  refer to page 204     1  Open the hood  refer to page 197          2  Turn the cap counterclockwise and re     2  Pull the connector off the bulb   3  Attach the connector to the new bulb     4  First insert the bulb at the top with the  strap  arrow 1  and then press down firmly   arrow 2  Make sure that the bulb snaps into    Parking lamps  6 watt bulb  H6W  place     1  Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise and  remove        5  Close the headlamp housing with the cap   Make sure that the cap engages        2  Press the bulb gently into the socket  turn  counterclockwise and remove     3  To insert the bulb and bulb holder  proceed  in reverse order of removal  Make sure that  the bulb holder snaps into place     4  Close the headlamp housing with the cap   Make sure that the cap engages     207  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 9
264. the collision warning is  controlled via the cruise control radar sensor     The collision warning is available even if cruise  control has been deactivated     When the vehicle is intentionally brought close  to a vehicle  the collision warning is delayed to  avoid false warnings     General information    The system issues a two phase warning of a  possible danger of collision with vehicles at  speeds above approx  3 mph 5 km h  The time  of these warnings may vary depending on the  current driving situation     Detection range       It responds to objects if they are detected by  the radar     106       Ata glance    Button in the vehicle       Intelligent Safety button    Switching on off    Switching on automatically    The system is automatically active every time  the engine is started using the Start Stop but   ton     Switching off    E Press button  the system is switched  off  The LED goes out     Re press button  the system is switched on   The LED lights up      FAN    Setting the prewarning time  The prewarning time can be set via iDrive     1   Settings    2   Frontal Coll  Warning    3  Activate the desired time on the Control  Display    The selected time is stored for the remote   control currently in use     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Safety   Controls    Display  Warning stages    Prewarning    This warning is issued  for example  when  there is the impending danger of a collision or  the distance to the vehicle ahead is too sma
265. the highest  B   and C  representing the tire s resistance to the  generation of heat and its ability to dissipate  heat when tested under controlled conditions  on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel   Sustained high temperature can cause the ma   terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire  life  and excessive temperature can lead to  sudden tire failure  The grade C corresponds  to a level of performance which all passenger  car tires must meet under the Federal Motor  Vehicle Safety Standard No  109  Grades Band  A represent higher levels of performance on  the laboratory test wheel than the minimum re   quired by law     Temperature grade for this tire    The temperature grade for this tire is es   tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and  not overloaded  Excessive speed  underinfla   tion  or excessive loading  either separately or  in combination  can cause heat buildup and  possible tire failure     If necessary  have the vehicle towed   lt     RSC   Run flat tires    Run flat tires  refer to page 195  are labeled  with a circular symbol containing the letters  RSC marked on the sidewall     M S    Winter and all season tires with better cold  weather performance than summer tires     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Wheels and tires   Mobility      Tire tread    Summer tires    Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than  0 12 in 3 mm     There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if  the tread depth is less than 0 12
266. the mirror     2  To change the zone setting  press the con   trol button quickly and repeatedly until the  number of the compass zone correspond   ing to your location appears in the mirror     The set zone is stored automatically  The com   pass is ready for use again after approximately  10 seconds     Calibrating the digital compass   The digital compass must be calibrated in the   event of the following     gt  The wrong point of the compass is dis   played     gt  The point of the compass displayed does  not change despite changing the direction  of travel      gt  Not all points of the compass are dis   played     Procedure    1     Make sure that there are no large metallic  objects or overhead power lines near the  vehicle and that there is sufficient room to  drive around in a circle     Set the currently applicable compass zone     Press and hold the control button for ap   prox  6 to 7 seconds so that  C  appears  on the display  Next  drive in a complete  circle at least once at a speed of no more  than 4 mph 7 km h  If calibration is suc   cessful  the  C  is replaced by the points of  the compass     Left right hand steering    The digital compass is already set for right or  left hand steering at the factory     Setting the language    Press and hold the control button for approx   12 to 13 seconds  Briefly press the control  button again to switch between English  E   and German  O      151    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Interior eq
267. the mounting point    1  Remove the mounting point cover   2  Raise the head restraint     3  Guide the upper retaining strap between  the supports of the head restraint     4  Attach the hook of the retaining strap to  the mounting eye     60  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Driving   Controls    Driving    Vehicle equipment    All standard  country specific and optional  equipment that is offered in the model series is  described in this chapter  Therefore  equip   ment is also described that is not available in a  vehicle  e  g   because of the selected optional  equipment or country variant  This also applies  for safety related functions and systems     Start Stop button    The concept    Pressing the Start Stop button  switches the ignition on or off  and starts the engine     Automatic transmission  The  engine starts if the brake is de   pressed while pressing the Start Stop button        Manual transmission  the engine starts if the  clutch pedal is depressed when the Start Stop  button Is pressed     Ignition on  Automatic transmission  Press the Start Stop  button but do not depress the brake     Manual shift transmission  press the Start   Stop button  and do not press on the clutch  pedal at the same time     All vehicle systems are ready for operation     Most of the indicator and warning lamps in the  instrument cluster light up for varying lengths  of time     To save battery power when the engine is off   switch off the ignition and any
268. the system     Detection range       The detection capacity of the system and the  automatic braking capacity are limited     Two wheeled vehicles driving ahead of you  for instance might not be detected     Limited detection capacity    Because of the limits to the detection ca   pacity  you should be alert at all times so that  you can intervene if necessary  otherwise   there is the danger of an accident occurring   lt     Deceleration    The system does not decelerate when a sta   tionary obstacle is located in the same lane   e g   a vehicle at a red traffic light or at the end  of traffic congestion     The system also does not respond to      gt  Pedestrians or similar slow moving road  users     Red traffic lights   Stationary objects   Cross traffic     VV V OV    Oncoming traffic     No warnings    A warning may not be issued when ap   proaching a stationary or very slow moving ob   stacle  You must react yourself  otherwise   there is the danger of an accident occurring   lt     124    Swerving vehicles       A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected  until it is completely within the same lane as  your vehicle     Swerving vehicles    If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly  swerves into your lane  the system may not be  able to automatically restore the selected dis   tance  This also applies to major speed differ   ences to vehicles driving ahead of you  e g    when rapidly approaching a truck  When a ve   hicle driving ahead of you is reliably detect
269. ting    Height Electrically adjustable seats    At a glance       Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat  or lift it off  as necessary        Seat and mirror memory   Backrest width   Lumbar support   Backrest tilt   Forward backward  height  seat tilt    Backrest tilt    a fF WON      Note    The seat setting for the driver s seat is stored  for the remote control currently in use  When  the vehicle is unlocked via the remote control   the position is automatically retrieved if the  function  refer to page 41  is activated for this  purpose        Pull the lever and apply your weight to the  backrest or lift it off  as necessary     Seat tilt Adjustments in detail        1  Forward back        Pull the lever and move the seat to the desired  tilt  After releasing the lever  apply your weight    to the seat or lift it off to make sure the seat  engages properly        48  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Adjusting   Controls    2  Height  Thigh support       A  n   gt   i K  y      i i  A  AN               3  Seat tilt  Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust  the thigh support   Lumbar support    The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad   justed in such a way that it supports the lumbar  region of the spine  The lower back and the  spine are supported for upright posture      gt  Press the front rear section  of the switch     The curvature is increased   decreased         gt  Press the upper lower sec   tion of the switch     T
270. ting aid terminals    Connecting order    Connect the jumper cables in the correct  order  otherwise  there is the danger of injury  from sparking   lt        The so called starting aid terminal in the en   gine compartment acts as the battery s posi   tive terminal     Open the cover of the starting aid terminal        iN  5      The body ground or a special nut acts as the  battery negative terminal     Connecting the cables    1  Open the cover of the BMW starting aid  terminal     2  Attach one terminal clamp of the positive  jumper cable to the positive terminal of the  battery  or to the corresponding starting  aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis   tance     3  Attach the terminal clamp on the other end  of the cable to the positive terminal of the  battery  or to the corresponding starting  aid terminal of the vehicle to be started     4  Attach one terminal clamp of the negative  jumper cable to the negative terminal of  the battery  or to the corresponding engine  or body ground of assisting vehicle     5  Attach the second terminal clamp to the  negative terminal of the battery  or to the  corresponding engine or body ground of  the vehicle to be started     Starting the engine  Never use spray fluids to start the engine   1  Start the engine of the assisting vehicle    and let it run for several minutes at an in   creased idle speed     If the vehicle being started has a diesel en   gine  let the engine of the assisting vehicle  run for approx  10 minutes  
271. tion range       Vehicles are observed when they are traveling  in the same direction of movement if they are   located within the detection range of the sys    tem     At a glance    Button in the vehicle       Cn   a E A       Intelligent Safety button    Camera       The camera is located near the base of the  mirror     104          Keep the windshield in the area behind the in   terior rear view mirror clean and clear     Switching on off    Switching on automatically    The system is automatically active every time  the engine is started using the Start Stop but   ton     Switching off       Press button  the system is switched  off  The LED goes out     Re press button  the system is switched on   The LED lights up     JEN    Setting the prewarning time  The prewarning time can be set via iDrive     1   Settings   2   Frontal Coll  Warning     3  Activate the desired time on the Control  Display    The selected time is stored for the remote   control currently in use     Warning with braking function    Note    Adapting your speed and driving style  The warning does not relieve the driver    of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving  speed and style to the traffic conditions  lt     Display   If a collision with a vehicle detected in this way  is Imminent  a warning symbol appears on the   instrument cluster and in the Head up Display     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Safety   Controls    Symbol Measure    The vehicle lights up red  pre
272. tive Light Control    The concept    Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlamp  control system that enables dynamic illumina   tion of the road surface     Depending on the steering angle and other pa   rameters  the light from the headlamp follows  the course of the road     In tight curves  e g   on mountainous roads or  when turning  one of the two front fog lamps is  switched on as a cornering lamp  As a result  the inside of the curve is better lighted     Activating   Switch position 2  with the ignition switched  on    The cornering lamps are automatically  switched on depending on the steering angle  or the use of turn signals     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Lamps   Controls    To avoid blinding oncoming traffic  the Adap   tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv   er s side when the vehicle is at a standstill     When driving in reverse  only the cornering  lamp is active     Malfunction  A Check Control message is displayed     Adaptive light control is malfunctioning or has  failed  Have the system checked as soon as  possible     High beam Assistant    The concept    When the low beams are switched on  this sys   tem automatically switches the high beams on  and off or suppresses the light in the areas that  blind oncoming traffic  The procedure is con   trolled by a sensor on the front of the interior  rearview mirror  The assistant ensures that the  high beams are switched on whenever the traf   fic situation allows  The dri
273. tness     i    Interior lamps       Adjust the brightness using the  thumbwheel     General information    The interior lamps  footwell lamps  entry lamps  and courtesy lamps are controlled automati   cally     The brightness of some of these lamps is influ   enced by the thumbwheel for the instrument  lighting        1 Interior lamps    2 Reading lamp    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Lamps   Controls    Switching the interior lamps on and    off  Press the button   A    To switch off permanently  press the button for  approx  3 seconds     Switch back on  press button     Reading lamps    Press the button     Reading lamps are located at the front and rear  next to the interior lamps     Ambient light    Depending on the equipment  the lighting can  be adjusted in the interior for some lights     Selecting color scheme    1   Settings   2   Lighting   3   Ambient      4  Select the desired setting     If the color scheme of the line is selected and  the welcome lamps are activated  the welcome  lamps are displayed in the color of the line  when the vehicle is unlocked     Setting the brightness   The brightness of the ambient light can be ad   justed via the thumbwheel for the instrument  lighting or on the Control Display     Settings     Lighting     Brightness     Adjust the brightness     oY      93  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Safety       Safety    Vehicle equipment    All standard  country specific and optional  equi
274. to page 178     2  Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise and re   move     3  Place the bottle on it and turn it as far as it  will go  see arrow        4  Press the bottle down  see arrow     The vehicle tank will be filled     The tank is full when the fill level in the bot   tle no longer changes  It is not possible to  overfill        5  Pull back the bottle  see arrow  and un   screw it        6  Replace the fuel cap and turn it clockwise   7  Close the fuel filler flap     After adding Diesel exhaust fluid    Note    Incorrect fluids       After filling with incorrect fluids  such as  antifreeze for washer water  do not start the  engine  otherwise there is risk of fire  lt     Contact your service center     Disposing of bottles    You take your empty Diesel exhaust  fluid bottles to your Service Center for  disposal     183    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14       Mobility   Fuel    Do not dispose of empty bottles with house   hold waste unless this is permitted by local  regulations     Reserve display    The Reserve display will still ap   pear along with the remaining  range after refilling     Engine can be started        After several minutes of driving   the Reserve indication goes out     Diesel exhaust fluid on minimum  After filling  the indication    is  still displayed     Only after the display goes out  can the engine    be started        1  Switch on the ignition   Display    goes out after approx  1 minute   2  Engine can be started    
275. to prevent the finish from being  altered or discolored     Leather care    Remove dust from the leather often  using a  cloth or vacuum cleaner     Otherwise  particles of dust and road grime  chafe in pores and folds  and lead to increased  wear and premature degradation of the leather  surface     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Care   Mobility      To guard against discoloration  such as from  clothing  provide leather care roughly every  two months     Clean light colored leather more frequently be   cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially  more visible     Use leather care products  otherwise  dirt and  grease will gradually break down the protective  layer of the leather surface     Suitable care products are available from the  service center     Upholstery material care  Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner     If they are very dirty  e g   beverage stains  use  a soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suita   ble interior cleaner     Clean the upholstery down to the seams using  large sweeping motions  Avoid rubbing the  material vigorously     Damage from Velcro   fasteners       Open Velcro   fasteners on pants or  other articles of clothing can damage the seat  covers  Ensure that any Velcro   fasteners are  closed  lt     Caring for special components    Light alloy wheels    When cleaning the vehicle  use only neutral  wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9   Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam  jets above 140   F
276. trol  currently in use     Signaling briefly   Press the lever to the resistance point and hold  it there for as long as you want the turn signal  to flash     66          High beams  headlamp flasher             gt  High beams  arrow 1    gt  Headlamp flasher  arrow 2     Washer wiper system    Switching the wipers on off and brief  wipe  Do not switch on the wipers if frozen    Do not switch on the wipers if they are  frozen onto the windshield  otherwise  the  wiper blades and the windshield wiper motor  may be damaged        No wiper operation on dry windshield    Do not use the windshield wipers if the  windshield is dry  as this may damage the  wiper blades or cause them to become worn  more quickly       No wiper operation with wipers folded  away    Do not switch on the wipers if they are folded  away  otherwise the hood or the wipers may be  damaged   lt     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Driving   Controls    Switching on       Press the wiper levers up     The lever automatically returns to its initial po   sition when released      gt  Normal wiping speed  press up once     The wipers switch to intermittent operation  when the vehicle is stationary      gt  Fast wiping speed  press up twice or press  once beyond the resistance point     The wipers switch to normal speed when  the vehicle is stationary     Switching off and brief wipe        Press the wiper levers down     The lever automatically returns to its initial po   sition when relea
277. trument cluster and on the  Control Display     Functional requirement    The function is only available in ECO PRO  mode     Calling up ECO PRO driving style  analysis    Via the Driving Dynamics Control  1  Activate ECO PRO    2      EfficientDynamics    3  A   Select the symbol     Display    Display on the Control Display       173    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Driving tips   ecm Saving fuel    The display of the ECO PRO driving style anal   ysis consists of a symbolized road route and a  lookup table     The road symbolizes the efficiency of the driv   ing style  The more efficient the driving style   the smoother the depicted road route be   comes  arrow 1     The table of values contains stars  The more  efficient the driving style  the more stars are in   cluded in the table and the faster the bonus  range increases  arrow 2     If  on the other hand  the driving style is ineffi   cient  a wavy road and a reduced number of  stars is displayed     To assist with an efficient driving style  ECO  PRO tips are displayed during the drive     Tips about the energy saving driving style   Conserving fuel  refer to page 168     174  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Saving fuel i ee tips    175  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14                Witeleitiname Refueling             Refueling    Vehicle equipment 2  Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise     All standard  country specific and optional  equipment that i
278. ts up    gt  Off  the LED goes out     The system can issue warnings at speeds  above approx  30 mph 50 km h     The setting is stored for the remote control  currently in use     Display       Information stage    The dimmed lamp in the mirror housing indi   cates when there are vehicles in the blind spot  or approaching from behind     Warning    If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the  critical zone  the steering wheel vibrates briefly    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Safety   Controls    and the lamp in the mirror housing flashes Brake force display  brightly    The warning stops when the turn signal is The concept   switched off  or the other vehicle leaves the 7   critical zone  A 4   System limits be             The system may not be fully functional in the  following situations           gt  When a vehicle is approaching at a speed  much faster than your own        In heavy fog  rain or snowfall     brake   light up   If the bumper is dirty or iced up  or covered EE eae ee    with stickers   gt  During heavy brake application  the inner    ke lamps light up in addition   A Check Control message is displayed when Brake lamps Ont UPIM AQANON    the system is not fully functional     For US owners only    The transmitter and receiver units comply with  part 15 of the FCC Federal Communication  Commission regulations  Operation is gov   erned by the following     FCC ID     gt  NBG009014A    Compliance statement    This device complies
279. uipment       The setting is stored automatically after ap   proximately 10 seconds     Ashtray cigarette lighter    Ashtray       Raise cover     Emptying  Take out the insert     Lighter    Danger of burns    Only hold the hot lighter by its knob  oth   erwise  there is the danger of getting burned        Switch off the ignition and take the remote  control with you when leaving the vehicle so  that children cannot use the lighter and burn  themselves        Replace the cover after use    Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after  use  otherwise objects may get into the lighter  socket or fixture and cause a short circuit     152       Push in the lighter     The lighter can be removed as  soon as it pops back out        Connecting electrical  devices    Hints    Do not connect charging devices to the  12 volt socket in the vehicle    Do not connect battery chargers to the fac   tory installed 12 volt sockets in the vehicle as  this may damage the vehicle battery due to an  increased power consumption   lt     Replace the cover after use    Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after  use  otherwise objects may get into the lighter  socket or fixture and cause a short circuit     Sockets    The lighter socket can be used as a socket for  electrical equipment while the engine is run   ning or when the ignition is switched on  The  total load of all sockets must not exceed   140 watts at 12 volts     Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable  connectors     Online Edition 
280. ulates the air currently  within the vehicle     wave  Press the button repeatedly to select  an operating mode      gt  LEDs off  outside air flows in continuously     Left LED on  automatic recirculated air  control  a sensor detects pollutants in the  outside air and controls the shutoff auto   matically      gt  Right LED on  recirculated air mode  the  supply of outside air into the vehicle is per   manently blocked     Recirculated air mode switches off automati   cally at low external temperatures after a cer   tain amount of time in order to window fog   ging    If the windows are fogged over  switch off the  recirculated air mode and press the AUTO  button to utilize the condensation sensor   Make sure that air can flow onto the wind   shield     Continuous recirculated air mode    The recirculated air mode should not be  used for an extended period of time  as the air  quality inside the vehicle deteriorates stead   ily  lt     145    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Controls     Climate control    Manual air distribution       SF Press the button repeatedly to select    gt     a program    gt  Upper body region     gt  Upper body region and footwell     gt  Footwell     gt  Windows and footwell  driver s side only    gt  Windows  upper body region and footwell     driver s side only     If the windows are fogged over  press the  AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen   sor     Air flow  manual  To be able to manually adjust the air flow  
281. un flat tires  continued driving  may result in serious accidents        When a low inflation pressure is indicated   DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on  if necessary     Actions in the event of a flat tire    Normal tires  1  Identify the damaged tire     Do this by checking the air pressure in all  four tires     If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires  is correct  it is possible that a reset was not  carried out for the Tire Pressure Monitor   Then perform the reset     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Safety   Controls    If an identification is not possible  please  contact the service center     2  Fix the flat tire   Run flat tires    Maximum speed    You can continue driving with a damaged tire  at speeds up to 50 mph 80 km h     Continued driving with a flat tire  If continuing to drive with a damaged tire     1  Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu   vers     2  Donot exceed a speed of 50 mph 80 km h     3  Check the air pressure in all four tires at  the next opportunity     If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires  is correct  it is possible that a reset was not  carried out for the Tire Pressure Monitor  In  that case  carry out a reset     Possible driving distance with complete loss of  tire inflation pressure     The possible driving distance after a loss of tire  inflation pressure depends on the cargo load  and the driving style and conditions     For a vehicle containing an average load  the  possible driv
282. under Tire inflation pressure  refer to  page 185  as well when using the system     Functional requirements    The system must have been reset with the  correct tire inflation pressure  otherwise  relia   ble signaling of tire pressure loss is not en   sured     Reset the system after each adjustment of the  tire inflation pressure and after every tire or  wheel change     Always use wheels with TPM electronics to  ensure that the system will operate properly     Status display   The current status of the Tire Pressure Moni   tor TPM can be displayed on the Control Dis   play  e g   whether or not the TPM is active    1   Vehicle Info    2   Vehicle status    3   1   Tire Pressure Monitor  TPM     The status is displayed     Status control display    The tire and system status Is indicated by the  color of the wheels and a text message on the  Control Display     97    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Controls     Safety    All wheels green    System is active and will issue a warning rela   tive to the tire inflation pressures stored during  the last reset     One wheel is yellow    A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in  the indicated tire     All wheels are yellow    A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in  several tires     Wheels  gray    The system cannot detect a flat tire  Reasons  for this may be      gt  The system is being reset    gt  Malfunction     Carry out reset   Reset the system after each adjustment of the  tire
283. upport the export      Settings     Profiles     Export profile    BMW Online   BMW Online   USB interface   USB device     mop e    Importing profiles   Existing settings and contacts are overwritten  with the imported profile     Settings     Profiles     Import profile    BMW Online   BMW Online    USB interface   USB device     oS m a    Using the guest profile    The guest profile can be used to make individ   ual settings that are saved in none of the three  personal profiles     This can be useful for drivers who are using  the vehicle temporarily and do not have their  own profile    1   Settings    2   Profiles    3  Open  Guest      The guest profile cannot be renamed  It is not  assigned to the current remote control     Display profile list during start   The profile list can be displayed during each  start for selecting the desired profile    Settings     Profiles    Open  Options      S    u S     Display user list at startup     Using the remote control    Note    Take the remote control with you    People or animals left unattended in a  parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in   side  Always take the remote control with you  when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle  can then be opened from the outside   lt     Unlocking    Eu Press the button on the remote con   trol     The vehicle is unlocked    Welcome lamps  interior lamp and courtesy  lamps are switched on    You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked   Performing settings  refer to page 41  
284. ured again     Replenishing Diesel exhaust fluid  yourself in exceptional cases    You can replenish reducing agent yourself in  exceptional cases  e g   to get to the service  center    Avoid contact with Diesel exhaust fluid    Do not come into contact with the reduc   ing agent  Otherwise  skin or eye irritations  may result  lt     Handling Diesel exhaust fluid    When working with reducing agent in  closed spaces  ensure good ventilation  When  the bottle or container is opened  acrid smell   ing fumes may escape   lt     Keeping Diesel exhaust fluid out of reach  of children    Keep reducing agent out of reach of children lt     Avoid contact with surfaces    Avoid contact of reducing agent with sur   faces of the vehicle  Damage could result     Suitable Diesel exhaust fluid     gt  Preferred  BMW Diesel Exhaust Fluid  With  this bottle and its special adapter  Diesel    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Fuel   Mobility      exhaust fluid can be replenished simply  and safely      gt  Alternative  NOx reduction agent AUS 32    Diesel exhaust fluid can be purchased at your  Service Center     Refill quantity    When the Reserve display starts  add at least 2  bottles of reducing agent     This corresponds to approx  1 gallon     Tank for reducing agent       The tank for the reducing agent is located next  to the fuel tank     Adding the reducing agent   Add the reducing agent when the ignition is  switched on    1  Open the fuel filler flap  refer 
285. uster  electronic  displays 75   Instrument lighting 92   Integrated key 32   Integrated Owner s Manual in  the vehicle 27   Intelligent Emergency Re   quest 215   Intelligent Safety 102   Intensity  AUTO pro   gram 145   Interior equipment 148    236    Interior lamps 92   Interior lamps via remote con   trol 36   Interior motion sensor 43   Interior rearview mirror  auto   matic dimming feature 56   Interior rearview mirror  com   pass 150   Interior rearview mirror  man   ually dimmable 56   Internet page 6   Interval display  service re   quirements 80    J    Jacking points for the vehicle  jack 212   Joystick  automatic transmis   sion 70   Jump starting 216    K    Key remote control 32   Keyless Go  refer to Comfort  Access 39   Key Memory  refer to Per   sonal Profile 33   Kickdown  automatic trans   mission 70   Knee airbag 94    L    Lamp replacement 204   Lamp replacement  front 205   Lamp replacement  rear 210   Lamps 89   Lamps and bulbs 204   Lane departure warning 110   Lane margin  warning 110   Language on Control Dis   play 86   Lashing eyes  securing  cargo 166    LATCH child restraint fixing  system 58   Launch Control 72   Leather  care 222   LEDs  light emitting di   odes 205   Length  vehicle 228   Letters and numbers  enter   ing 23   Light alloy wheels  care 223   Light control 90   Light emitting diodes   LEDs 205   Lighter 152   Lighting 89   Lighting via remote con   trol 36   Light switch 89   Load 166   Loading 165   Lock  door 37   Locking unlo
286. vehicle in the range of the ra   dar sensor moves off      gt  Marking in the speedometer turns orange   no automatic driving away     To accelerate to the desired speed auto   matically  press the accelerator or press  the RES or SET button     Rolling bars in the distance display indicate  that the vehicle in the radar sensor detection  range has moved off     Your vehicle was braked to a halt by pressing  on the brake pedal and it is standing behind  another vehicle     1  RES Press the button to call up a stored    desired speed   2  Release the brake pedal     3  Press on the accelerator briefly  or press  the RES rocker switch when the vehicle  ahead of you drives away     Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14    Driving comfort   Controls    Displays in the instrument cluster    Desired speed       gt  The marking lights up green   the system is active        The marking lights up or   ange  the system has been  interrupted      gt  The marking does not light up  the system  is switched off     Brief status display    e   Selected desired speed   99    If     appears briefly on the display for Check  Control messages  it is possible that the sys   tem requirements for operation are currently  not met     Distance to vehicle ahead of you    The selected distance to the vehicle driving  ahead of you is shown     Distance display    Distance 1  Distance 2  Distance 3    Distance 4    This value is set after the system is  switched on     The system has been 
287. vents  Intervene actively when  necessary  e g   by braking  steering or making  an evasive maneuver  otherwise  there is dan   ger of an accident  lt     119    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Controls     Driving comfort    Ata glance    Buttons on the steering wheel    Press the    oO       m a   r  O   gt     A    RES       Function    System on off  interrupt  refer to  page 120    Maintaining storing the speed   refer to page 121    Resume speed  refer to  page 122    Reduce distance  refer to  page 122    Increase distance  refer to  page 122    Rocker switch     Maintaining storing the speed   refer to page 121    Changing  maintaining  and  storing the speed  refer to  page 121    The arrangement of the buttons varies accord   ing to the how the vehicle is equipped or coun   try specific variants     Radar sensor    A radar sensor is located in the front bumper  for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the    vehicle     120       A dirty or covered sensor may hinder the de   tection of vehicles      gt  If necessary  clean the radar sensor  Re   move layers of snow and ice carefully      gt  Do not cover the view field of the radar  sensor     Switching on off and interrupting  cruise control    Switching on    P Er   Press the button on the steering  Ml wheel     The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster  light up and the mark in the speedometer is set  to the current speed     Cruise control can be used     Switching off    Deactivate
288. ver can intervene at  any time and switch the high beams on and off  as uSual     Activating       The High beam Assistant can be activated  when the low beams are switched on     1  Turn the light switch to 2  or   D      2  Press the button on the turn signal lever   arrow         The indicator lamp in the instrument   A cluster lights up     When the low beams are on  the lights are au   tomatically brightened or dimmed     The system responds to light from oncoming  traffic and traffic driving ahead of you  and to  adequate illumination  e g   in towns and cities     The blue indicator lamp in the instru   ment cluster lights up when the system   switches on the high beams  Depend   ing on the version of the system in the vehicle   the high beams may not switch off for oncom   ing vehicles  but may only be dimmed in the  areas that blind oncoming traffic  In this case   the blue indicator light will stay on     Switching the high beams on and off  manually        gt  High beams on  arrow 1    gt  High beams off headlamp flasher  arrow 2     The High beam Assistant can be switched off  when manually adjusting the light  To reacti   vate the High beam Assistant  press the but   ton on the turn signal lever     System limits    Personal responsibility    The high beam assistant cannot serve as  a substitute for the driver s personal judgment  of when to use the high beams  Therefore   manually switch off the high beams in situa   tions where this is required to avoid a safet
289. volume  Turn the volume button while giving an in   struction until the desired volume is set      gt  The volume remains constant even if the  volume of other audio sources is changed      gt  The volume is stored for the remote con   trol currently in use     Hints on Emergency  Requests    Do not use the voice activation system to ini   tiate an Emergency Request  In stressful situa   tions  the voice and vocal pitch can change     25    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 743   11 14       Ataglance GECUL  E Voice activation system    This can unnecessarily delay the establish   ment of a telephone connection     Instead  use the SOS button  refer to  page 215  in the vicinity of the interior mirror     Environmental conditions     gt  Say the commands  numbers  and letters  smoothly and with normal volume  empha   sis  and speed      gt  Always say commands in the language of  the voice activation system      gt  Keep the doors  windows  and glass sun   roof closed to prevent noise interference      gt  Avoid making other noise in the vehicle  while speaking     26  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Integrated Owner s Manual in the vehicle   Ataglance a glance    Integrated Owner s Manual in the vehicle    Vehicle equipment Select components   All standard  country specific and optional 1  MENU Press ihe burton    equipment that is offered in the model series is e Teecno e  described in this chapter  Therefore  equip      Op    ment is also descr
290. warn   ing   Increase braking and distance     The vehicle flashes red and an  acoustic signal sounds  acute warn   ing    You are requested to intervene by  braking or making an evasive ma   neuver     DB  D    Braking intervention    The warning prompts the driver himself to in   tervene  During a warning  the maximum brak   ing force is used  A prerequisite for the brake  booster is a sufficiently fast and sufficiently  strong actuation of the brake pedal  In addition   if there is a risk of collision  the system can as   sist with a slight braking intervention  The in   tervention can bring a vehicle traveling at slow  speed to a complete stop     Manual transmission  During a braking inter   vention up until reaching a complete stop  the  engine may be shut down     The braking intervention is executed only if  DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on  and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti   vated     The braking intervention can be interrupted by  pressing on the accelerator pedal or by actively  moving the steering wheel     Tow starting and towing    When tow starting and towing the vehi   cle  switch off the Intelligent Safety systems   otherwise  improper behavior of the braking  function of individual systems could result in  an accident  lt     Online Edition for Part no     System limits    Be alert    Due to system limitations  warnings may  be not be Issued at all  or may be issued late or  improperly  Therefore  always be alert and  ready to intervene  
291. witched off  The LED goes out     Press the button  the systems are switched off   The LED lights up        Settings can be made on the Control Display     Collision warning    Depending on how the equipment is equipped   the collision warning system consists of one of  the two systems      gt  Collision warning with City Braking func   tion  refer to page 103      gt  Collision warning with braking function  re   fer to page 106    Collision warning with City  Braking function    The concept    The system can help to prevent accidents  If  an accident cannot be prevented  the system  helps to reduce the collision speed     The system issues a warning if there is immi   nent danger of a collision and if so brakes inde   pendently     The automatic braking intervention is done  with limited force and duration     The system is controlled via a camera in the  base of the mirror     The collision warning is available even if cruise  control has been deactivated     When the vehicle is intentionally brought close  to a vehicle  the collision warning is delayed to  avoid false warnings     General information    The system issues a two phase warning of a  danger of collision with vehicles at speeds  above approx  3 mph 5 km h  The time of these  warnings may vary depending on the current  driving situation     Up to approx  35 mph 60 km h a braking inter   vention occurs when appropriate     103    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Controls     Safety    Detec
292. xle load los kg 2 280 1 034  Approved rear axle load los kg 2 560 1 161  Approved roof load capacity los kg 165 75  Cargo area capacity cu ft l 16 9 480       Approved gross vehicle weight los kg 4 365 1 980  Load los kg 900 408  Approved front axle load los kg 1 995 905  Approved rear axle load los kg 2 490 1 129  Approved roof load capacity los kg 165 75  Cargo area capacity cu ft l 16 9 480          Approved gross vehicle weight los kg 4 540 2 059   Load los kg 900 408   Approved front axle load lbs kg 2 160 980  230    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Technical data Reference       Approved rear axle load los kg 2 525 1 145  Approved roof load capacity los kg 165 75  Cargo area capacity cu ft l 16 9 480  Capacities    Fuel tank Gasoline  15 8 60 Fuel quality  refer to  Diesel  15 57 page 180       231  Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Reference   Everything from A to Z  Everything from A to Z    Index  A    ABS  Antilock Brake Sys   tem 114   ACC  Active Cruise Control  with Stop  amp  Go 119   Acceleration Assistant  refer  to Launch Control 72   Accessories and parts 7   Activated charcoal filter 146   Active Blind Spot Detec   tion 111   Active Cruise Control with  Stop  amp  Go  ACC 119   Adaptive brake lights  refer to  Brake force display 113   Adaptive Light Control 90   Additives  oil 199   Adjustments  seats head re   straints 47   After washing vehicle 222   Airbags 94   Airbags  indicator warning  light 95   Air circu
293. y  risk  lt     91    Online Edition for Part no  01 40 2 925 748   11 14    Controls     Lamps    The system is not fully functional in situations  such as the following  and driver intervention  may be necessary      gt  In very unfavorable weather conditions   such as fog or heavy precipitation      gt  In detecting poorly lit road users  such as  pedestrians  cyclists  horseback riders and  wagons  when driving close to train or ship  traffic  and at animal crossings      gt  In tight curves  on hilltops or in depres   sions  in cross traffic or half obscured on   coming traffic on freeways      gt  In poorly lit towns and cities and in the  presence of highly reflective signs   At low speeds     gt  When the windshield behind the interior    rearview mirror is fogged over  dirty or cov   ered with stickers  etc     Camera       The camera is located near the base of the  mirror     Keep the windshield in the area behind the in   terior rear view mirror clean and clear     Fog lamps    Front fog lamps  The low beams must be switched on          O   Press the button  The green indicator  lamp lights up     92    If the automatic headlamp control  refer to  page 90  is activated  the low beams will come  on automatically when you switch on the front  fog lamps     When the high beams or headlamp flasher are  activated  the front fog lamps are not switched  on     Instrument lighting    Adjusting   amp  The parking lamps or low beams  must be switched on to adjust  the brigh
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
Guide utilisateur Chorus Portail Pro - bordeaux  Toshiba Portégé M780-S7221  SUAVIZANTE DE TELAS BOLETIN TECNICO  Notice d`utilisation Fitness  本製品には8円本体は含まれません。 別売りのSPH ー0Cー (シフト  PRIMERGY CX400 S2 シャーシ  KCE-350BT  IMCOV6L-HANDBUCH  file  User Manual Defibtech DDU-2300 Semi    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file